Favourite Autumn Recipes - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/autumn-recipes/ Nutritious and full flavoured recipes Tue, 15 Mar 2022 22:56:55 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.4 https://properfoodie.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/square-logo-96x96.png Favourite Autumn Recipes - ProperFoodie https://properfoodie.com/autumn-recipes/ 32 32 Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/#comments Tue, 15 Mar 2022 22:56:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2275 Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This warming sweet potato and chickpea curry is a great option for a delicious vegetarian...

Read More

The post Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour.

Sweet potato and chickpea curry in a bowl with naan bread and topped with yogurt and coriander.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This warming sweet potato and chickpea curry is a great option for a delicious vegetarian dinner with plenty of healthy veg and aromatic spicy flavours. The sweet potatoes really bring this dish to life by melting their wonderfully sweet caramelised juices into the spicy coconut sauce and creating a gorgeous consistency. A warm and inviting curry with husky flavours of cumin and garam masala and a pungent taste of ginger all infused with the sweetness of the potatoes. It really is the ultimate healthy, comfort food.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough sweet potato curry to serve 4 people:

Ingredients needed to make sweet potato and chickpea curry

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Sweet potatoes: If preferred you can use normal potatoes, and make potato and spinach curry.

Coconut milk: Use full fat coconut as reduced fat will make the curry watery.

Chickpeas: Optional or can be replaced with other pulses such as beans, split peas or lentils.

Yogurt (not pictured): Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them). As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion, garlic and ginger and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
  2. Stir in the curry powder, garam masala and cinnamon and cook for a further minute to allow the flavours to be released.
  3. Next add the cubed sweet potato, chopped tomatoes, tomato puree and coconut milk. Stir together well then bring to a gentle simmer.
  4. Place a lid on the pan and continue to simmer for around 30 minutes or until the potatoes are soft (blade of a knife pushes in easily).Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make sweet potato curry for steps 1-4.
  5. Meanwhile drain and rinse the can of chickpeas and wash the spinach leaves. Once the potatoes are cooked through, add the chickpeas and spinach to the curry. Stir in and continue to cook on the heat until the spinach has wilted. 
  6. Season with salt, pepper and lime juice then serve with rice and naan. Add toppings if desired: yogurt, fresh coriander, chilli flakes, onion seeds and lime wedges.Collage of 2 images showing how to make sweet potato curry for steps 5 and 6.

💭 Expert tips

  • Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
  • Chickpeas: To avoid any chickpeas skins floating around in the curry, place the chickpeas in a sieve then agitate under a running tap to loosen any skins. Pick these out and discard.
  • Make it your own: Use split peas, lentils or beans, or completely swap the chickpeas for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add other vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Is sweet potato and chickpea curry healthy?

This curry is packed full of nutrients including protein, fibre, iron and plenty of vitamins and minerals. Chickpeas are low in fat and high in protein and along with the sweet potatoes will do a great. Job of filling you up due to both containing plenty of fibre. Spinach is also a great option for boosting your iron and folate levels.

How to make this curry extra spicy?

If you like your curry hot then there are a couple of extras you can add to turn up the heat. Try adding fresh green or red chopped chillies during cooking. The increase the heat further use smaller chillies and leave in the seeds. You could also add chilli flakes whiles cooking or add chilli sauce or Tabasco as toppings.

How to store?

What to do with any leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover curry to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Sweet Potato and chick curry in a bowl with a piece of naan bread and extra naan and lime in the background.

🍛 Other Curry recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Sweet potato and chickpea curry in a bowl with naan bread and topped with yogurt and coriander.
Print

Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry

Warm and comforting sweet potato and chickpea curry made with a lightly spiced coconut sauce. This wholesome and nutritious vegetarian curry is made in one big pan and can be ready in just one hour.
Course Dinner, evening meal, fake away, main meal
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 238kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 1 onion roughly chopped
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 2 cm piece fresh ginger peeled and grated
  • 2 tablespoons medium curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • 2 large sweet potatoes peeled and chopped into small chunks
  • 2 tins of chopped tomatoes
  • 2 tablespoons tomato puree
  • 1 tin coconut milk full fat
  • 2 handfuls of baby spinach leaves
  • 1 small tin chickpeas
  • Lime juice to taste
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Extras to serve

  • Rice
  • Plain yogurt
  • Chilli flakes
  • Onion seeds
  • Fresh coriander
  • Naan bread

Instructions

  • Heat up the oil in a large frying pan, add the cumin seeds and fry for 30 seconds or until golden brown (be careful not to burn them). As soon as the seeds start to change colour add in the chopped onion, garlic and ginger and cook on a gentle heat until soft.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon cumin seeds, 1 onion, 1 clove garlic, 2 cm piece fresh ginger
  • Stir in the curry powder, garam masala and cinnamon and cook for a further minute to allow the flavours to be released.
    2 tablespoons medium curry powder, 1 teaspoon garam masala, 1 teaspoon cinnamon powder
  • Next add the cubed sweet potato, chopped tomatoes, tomato puree and coconut milk. Stir together well then bring to a gentle simmer.
    2 large sweet potatoes, 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, 2 tablespoons tomato puree, 1 tin coconut milk
  • Place a lid on the pan and continue to simmer for around 30 minutes or until the potatoes are soft (blade of a knife pushes in easily).
  • Meanwhile drain and rinse the can of chickpeas and wash the spinach leaves. Once the potatoes are cooked through, add the chickpeas and spinach to the curry. Stir in and continue to cook on the heat until the spinach has wilted.
    1 small tin chickpeas, 2 handfuls of baby spinach leaves
  • Season with salt, pepper and lime juice then serve with rice and naan. Add toppings if desired: yogurt, fresh coriander, chilli flakes, onion seeds and lime wedges.
    Lime juice to taste, Rice, Plain yogurt, Chilli flakes, Onion seeds, Fresh coriander, Naan bread

Notes

Note: Above nutritional info is for 1 portion of curry with toppings but without any sides such as rice or naan bread.
Sweet potatoes: If preferred you can use normal potatoes, and make potato and spinach curry.
Coconut milk: Use full fat coconut as reduced fat will make the curry watery.
Chickpeas: Optional or can be replaced with other pulses such as beans, split peas or lentils. To avoid any chickpeas skins floating around in the curry, place the chickpeas in a sieve then agitate under a running tap to loosen any skins. Pick these out and discard.
Yogurt: Yogurt is an optional topping, but its creamy and cooling nature works really well with the heat from the spices. Choose plain yogurt.
Frying cumin seeds: Add a couple of cumin seeds to test the heat of the oil. If the seeds bubble then the oil is hot enough. Add the rest of the seeds but only cook briefly, until just golden brown, before adding the onions. Be aware that cumin seeds are quick to burn, which will create a bitter taste throughout the dish.
Make it your own: Use split peas, lentils or beans, or completely swap the chickpeas for one of these. Try with different types of lentils (green, yellow) or add other vegetables such as roasted squash, roast cauliflower, courgette or aubergine. And for an extra protein boost try with shredded chicken or poached fish.
Is sweet potato and chickpea curry healthy?
This curry is packed full of nutrients including protein, fibre, iron and plenty of vitamins and minerals. Chickpeas are low in fat and high in protein and along with the sweet potatoes will do a great. Job of filling you up due to both containing plenty of fibre. Spinach is also a great option for boosting your iron and folate levels.
How to make this curry extra spicy?
If you like your curry hot then there are a couple of extras you can add to turn up the heat. Try adding fresh green or red chopped chillies during cooking. The increase the heat further use smaller chillies and leave in the seeds. You could also add chilli flakes whiles cooking or add chilli sauce or Tabasco as toppings.
How to store?
What to do with any leftovers? Once fully cooled you can transfer any leftover curry to a sealable container. Seal and keep in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to 1 month. To reheat defrost thoroughly in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and heat until piping hot throughout.

Nutrition

Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 282mg | Potassium: 988mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 25711IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 140mg | Iron: 4mg

This post was first published in Sept 2016. Updated in Mar 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

Sweet potato, chickpea & spinach vegetarian curry: a deliciously warming curry with plenty of healthy veg and aromatic spicy flavours | Properfoodie.com

 

The post Sweet Potato and Chickpea Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sweet-potato-spinach-curry/feed/ 8
Porcini Mushroom Risotto https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/ https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/#respond Thu, 24 Feb 2022 20:47:19 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1423 Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe This easy porcini mushroom risotto recipe is one...

Read More

The post Porcini Mushroom Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes.

Porcini mushroom risotto on a small plate with fresh dill and parmesan.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy porcini mushroom risotto recipe is one of my most favourite ways to enjoy mushrooms. Even better with a bit of truffle grated on top! Here the dried mushrooms are left to soak in boiling water and the liquid from this is used to make the risotto. Resulting in that wonderfully earthy mushroom flavour being encapsulated in every plump grain of rice. Delicious!

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough dried porcini mushroom risotto to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making mushroom risotto.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Mushrooms: Dried porcini mushrooms are used here. However, you can replace with your preferred type of mushroom (fresh or dried).

Risotto rice: Risotto has short grains and high starch content. Look for as Arborio rice, Carnaroli rice or simply; risotto rice.

Butter: Use butter! Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 

Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so I add it to all my risotto recipes. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.

Dill: A perfect paring to the earthy mushrooms, but also optional. If preferred leave out or replace with parsley.

Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well.

Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Soak the dried mushrooms in 500ml of hot water for at least 30 minutes until soft. After 30 minutes remove the mushrooms, reserving the liquid, and roughly chop. Then strain the liquid through a paper towel lined sieve into a clean bowl. 
  2. Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
  3. Add the rice and mix in well allowing the melted butter to coat each grain of rice.
  4. Next add the wine and simmer until the wine has nearly all reduced or been absorbed by the rice.Four images showing how to make mushroom risotto for steps 1-4.
  5. Then add two ladles of mushroom liquid, stirring attentively between each ladleful. Only add the second ladle when the first one has been fully absorbed.
  6. At this point switch to the veg stock to ensure the mushroom flavour isn't too overpowering. Add ladlefuls of the veg stock one at a time, again only adding the next ladleful when the previous has absorbed. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
  7. Stir in the soaked mushrooms, soured cream, parmesan and lemon juice.
  8. Serve the porcini mushroom risotto with fresh dill.Four images showing how to make mushroom risotto for steps 5-8.

💭 Expert tips

  • Soaking mushrooms: use a large bowl to soak the dried mushrooms and stir occasionally. The space and stirring will ensure all the mushrooms are fully soaked and plumped up.
  • Mushroom grit: Dried mushrooms can be gritty. To avoid a gritty risotto the mushrooms can be rinsed after they have been soaked. The soaking liquid will also contain grit, so before adding to the risotto this should be strained through a paper towel lined sieve. After straining leave it to settle allowing any leftover grit to sink to the bottom. Do not disturb the bottom when adding the liquid to the risotto.
  • Stock: This recipe uses 2 types of stock. The first is mushroom stock, made by soaking the mushrooms. The second is vegetable stock. The mushroom stock will be very strong as dried mushrooms have a very intense flavour, which can be overpowering. Therefore, I suggest only using 2 ladles of mushroom stock then switch to using vegetable stock. However, feel free to add more mushroom stock for a more intense flavour.
  • Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Why use dried porcini mushrooms?

Porcini mushrooms are known for their rich, nutty flavour and meaty texture. Fresh porcini mushrooms are hard to come by as whereas dried porcini are widely available year round.

In addition dried mushrooms have a stronger and more intense flavour than fresh. The need to rehydrate the mushrooms in hot water also creates a full flavoured mushroom stock that can be added to the mushroom risotto during cooking.

How to store porcini mushroom risotto?

Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the mushroom risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard.

Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).

What is the best rice for risotto?

Risotto has plump, short-medium grains and high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. Look for Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy).

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time.

Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

Small plate of mushroom risotto with second plate in the background.

🍝 Other Italian recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Porcini mushroom risotto on a small plate with fresh dill and parmesan.
Print

Porcini Mushroom Risotto

Porcini mushroom risotto with pearly grains of rice and nutty, plump mushrooms, topped with fresh dill and grated parmesan. Dried porcini mushrooms are used for a greater depth of flavour and the whole dish can be ready in just over 30 minutes.
Course Dinner, evening meal, Main Course, starter or main
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 634kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 50 g Dried porcini mushrooms
  • 20 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 170 g Carnaroli rice uncooked
  • 150 ml White wine
  • 500 ml Vegetable stock
  • 2 tablespoons Soured cream optional
  • 25 g Parmesan grated and extra to serve
  • ½ Lemon juiced
  • 20 g Fresh dill

Instructions

  • Soak the mushrooms in 500ml of hot water for at least 30 minutes until soft. After 30 minutes remove the mushrooms, reserving the liquid, and roughly chop. Then strain the liquid through a paper-towel lined sieve into a clean bowl.
    50 g Dried porcini mushrooms
  • Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
    20 g Butter, 1 Onion, 1 Garlic clove
  • Add the rice and mix in well allowing the melted butter to coat each grain of rice.
    170 g Carnaroli rice
  • Next add the wine and simmer until the wine has nearly all reduced or been absorbed by the rice.
    150 ml White wine
  • Then add two ladles of the mushroom liquid, stirring attentively between each ladleful. Only add the second ladle when the first one has been fully absorbed.
  • At this point switch to the veg stock to ensure the mushroom flavour isn't too overpowering. Add ladlefuls of the veg stock one at a time, again only adding the next ladleful when the previous has absorbed. It will probably take around 15-20 minutes to gradually add the whole lot. By this point the rice should have softened and plumped.
    500 ml Vegetable stock
  • Stir in the soaked mushrooms, soured cream, parmesan and lemon juice.
    2 tablespoons Soured cream, 25 g Parmesan, ½ Lemon juiced
  • Serve with fresh dill.
    20 g Fresh dill

Video

Notes

Mushrooms: Dried porcini mushrooms are used here. However, you can replace with your preferred type of mushroom (fresh or dried). Porcini mushrooms are known for their rich, nutty flavour and meaty texture. Fresh porcini mushrooms are hard to come by as whereas dried porcini are widely available year round. Use a large bowl to soak the dried mushrooms and stir occasionally. The space and stirring will ensure all the mushrooms are fully soaked and plumped up.
Mushroom grit: Dried mushrooms can be gritty. To avoid a gritty risotto the mushrooms can be rinsed after they have been soaked. The soaking liquid will also contain grit, so before adding to the risotto this should be strained through a paper-towel lined sieve. After straining leave it to settle allowing any leftover grit to sink to the bottom. Do not disturb the bottom when adding the liquid to the risotto.
Risotto rice: For risotto rice you are looking for short grains with a high starch content. Look for rice labelled as Arborio, Carnaroli or simply; risotto rice.
Butter: Use butter! Melted butter is used to 'awaken' the rice by coating and softening the uncooked grains so allowing liquids to be easily soaked in. 
Wine: I love the flavour of white wine in risotto and so I add it to all my risotto recipes. But if required it can be replaced with a little apple juice or just left out completely.
Dill: A perfect paring to the earthy mushrooms, but also optional. If preferred leave out or replace with parsley.
Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well. This recipe uses 2 types of stock. The first is mushroom stock, made by soaking the mushrooms. The second is vegetable stock. The mushroom stock will be very strong as dried mushrooms have a very intense flavour, which can be overpowering. Therefore, I suggest only using 2 ladles of the mushroom stock then switch to using vegetable stock. However, feel free to add more mushroom stock for a more intense flavour.
Parmesan: Any hard Italian cheese will work well.
Patience: Risotto does require a little patience. Take your time a don't rush the gradual addition of the stock, I promise its well worth it.
How to store? Risotto is best made fresh. The rice doesn't reheat well and more often than not, reheated risotto will overcook and become sloppy. So do bare this in mind when saving leftovers.

 Transfer any leftovers to sealable containers. Make sure the mushroom risotto has fully cooled before sealing and storing in the fridge for up to 2 days. Cooled risotto will set and become hard. 

Reheat by returning to the pan with a little hot water and stir until heated through and piping hot. (Please note that proper cooling and reheating is essential for rice dishes).
What is the best rice for risotto? Risotto rice has plump, short-medium grains with a high starch content. This gives risotto its well known creamy texture when cooked. Look for Arborio, Carnaroli, Vialone nano or just simply; risotto rice.

 Arborio rice is the most widely available type of risotto rice and produces a lovely thick and soft risotto, but can be susceptible to overcooking (becomes sloppy). 

Carnaroli isn't as easy to find but is known to be the best due to its higher starch content and resistance to overcooking, which pretty much guarantees a thick and creamy risotto every time. 

Vialone nano has smaller, round grains and is considered to be as good as Carnaroli but produces a soupier risotto.

Nutrition

Calories: 634kcal | Carbohydrates: 101g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 1299mg | Potassium: 727mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1729IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 217mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Nov 2015. Updated in Feb 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Porcini Mushroom Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mushroom-risotto-with-porcini/feed/ 0
Leek and Potato Soup https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/#respond Fri, 24 Jan 2020 16:18:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12133 Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable,...

Read More

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is leek and potato soup tasty and comforting but its also a really nutritious recipe and perfect for refuelling on a cold day. Potatoes are a starchy carbohydrate and a great source of calcium, Iron and B vitamins. With the skins on, potatoes also provide a good source of fibre. So to boost the fibre and the texture of this recipe, give your tatties a good wash and leave the skins on!

This warming, full flavoured, healthy potato soup also contains 1 portion of your 5 a day, from the onions, celery and leeks. Plus, each serving of soup comes in at under 300kcal, meaning that theres plenty of room left for a nice chunk of crusty bread on the side. For a soup without potatoes that still contains plenty of nutrients try my rustic, traditional Tuscan ribollita soup

🥘 Ingredients

To make a pot of this delicious leek and potato soup, to serve 4 people, you will need:

  • Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Vegetable stock 
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream (optional)
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.

Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 

Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 

Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery.

Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.

Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
  2. Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
  3. Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
  4. Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 1-4.
  5. When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half. 
  6. Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
  7. For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
  8. Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 5-8.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup?

To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.

How do you make potato soup thicker?

As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more.
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.

How to store?

Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.

What to serve with leek and potato soup?

Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.

What is Vichyssoise?

The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

A bowl of homemade leek and potato soup with a second bowl of soup in the background.

🥔 How can I get more potatoes into my diet?

Potatoes are so versatile and they are great served up with most things.  Like roast potatoes or mashed potatoes with your roast chicken or roast beef dinner on a Sunday. Or if you just want an easy side to go with your mid week meals try these garlic, herb foil pack potatoes. Other potato soups that are just as satisfying as leek and potato on a cold day are celeriac and potato soup or creamy clam chowder.  Or for a meal thats a little more substantial why not try my super affordable Frozen Salmon and potato traybake? Or salmon and mackerel fishcakes.

If you want something a little more indulgent then add potatoes to a pie: fish pie, minted lamb pie, cottage pie or shepherds pie. 

🍵 Other soup recipes you might like:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
Print

Leek and potato soup

Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.
Course main meal, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British, French
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 248kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 30 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 125g
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 100g
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 200
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed 600g
  • 500 ml vegetable stock Plus extra water if required
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream Optional
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve Optional

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
    30 g Butter, 1 Onion finely chopped, 2 celery sticks chopped
  • Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
    2 medium leeks chopped, 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
    500 ml vegetable stock
  • Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half.
  • Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
    Pinch of salt
  • For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
    2 tablespoon double cream
  • Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.
    Chopped chives and extra cream to serve

Video

Notes

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.
Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 
Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 
Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery. Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.
Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.
How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup? To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.
How do you make potato soup thicker? As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more. 
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.
How to store? Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.
What to serve with leek and potato soup? Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.
What is Vichyssoise? The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

Nutrition

Serving: 350ml | Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 26mg | Sodium: 645mg | Potassium: 840mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1513IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jan 2020. Updated in Sept 2021 with improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/feed/ 0
Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/ https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/#comments Fri, 16 Jun 2017 18:44:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4243 This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe When it comes to easy...

Read More

The post Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce.

chilli con carne in half a bowl with rice in the other half and a second bowl of chilli in the background.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

When it comes to easy weeknight recipes, chilli con carne has to be in the running. Its so quick to prepare and most of the ingredients are store cupboard or fridge basics. Once prepared, Mexican chilli con carne always benefits from a long, slow cook, either in the oven or slow cooker. The longer you leave it the thicker and more flavoursome the chilli. The kidney beans have been swapped for cannellini beans and the chilli is made extra rich and fragrant by the addition of cocoa powder and smoked paprika.

🥘 Ingredients

To make Mexican chilli con carne at home you will need:

ingredients to make chilli con carne

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Cannellini beans: cannellini beans have a soft texture and a light colour. But these can be replaced with the usual kidney bean if you prefer.

Bell pepper and celery: The bell pepper and celery are used in this recipe to add extra flavour and a more chunky texture, but again if you prefer you can leave these out.

Cocoa powder and Worcestershire sauce: To make this dish extra special I use Cocoa powder and Worcestershire sauce as my 'secret chilli ingredients'. Both add a rich flavour to the sauce which cuts through the sweet tomatoes and smokey spices. However, both of these are optional and if you prefer you can just leave them out.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat oven to 160°C/320°F. Add ½ tablespoon olive oil, 1 finely chopped onion, minced garlic cloves and 2 roughly chopped celery sticks to a large pan and stir fry. Then add the mince meat to the pan and roughly break up with a wooden spoon. 
  2. As the meat starts to cook add 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon hot chilli powder and 1 finely chopped red chilli pepper.
  3. Next add 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, 200g sliced baby tomatoes, 2 tablespoon tomato puree and 1 beef stock cube dissolved in a small amount of boiling water. Stir well then bring to a simmer.
  4. Add the chopped red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon cocoa powder, 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce and 1 tin of cannellini beans. Mix together well and then cover with a lid or tin foil.step by step images of how to make chilli con carne steps 1-4.
  5. Place in the centre of a preheated oven and cook at 160°C/320°F for 2 hours. Check and stir half way through. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 6-7 hours.
  6. Once cooked remove from the oven. Stir through some freshly chopped coriander and serve in bowls with rice, fresh chillies and soured cream.Images of how to make chilli con carne for recipe steps 5 and 6

💭 Expert tips

  • Use 2 chilli peppers or 2 teaspoon of hot chilli powder if you like your chilli super spicy
  • Instead of dissolving the stock cube in boiling water, try crumbling directly into the chilli so as not to water down the dish.
  • If you are short on time you can simmer the chilli on the stove for an hour or so instead of in the oven or slow cooker. However, for best results always cook in the oven.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once cooked allow to fully cool then transfer to sealable containers and refrigerate for up to 3 days or freeze for up 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight or in the fridge for 24 hours

Can cook chilli con carne in the slow cooker?

This chilli is best when loaded into an ovenproof dish and then slow cooked in the oven for a few hours. However, it can also be cooked in the slow cooker and this is a great option if you are out all day. Cook on medium in the slow cooker for 6-7 hours.

What to serve with chilli con carne?

The simplest is a nice helping of boiled rice, which can be made a little more interesting by stirring through some freshly chopped coriander and parsley. Being Mexican, Chilli con carne is also fantastic when served with tortilla chips, avocado, guacamole, soured cream, grated cheese and fresh coriander.

Why add cocoa to chilli?

Cocoa powder seems like an odd addition to a savoury dish. However, don't be put off as it really does make this dish extra special. The bitter flavour of the dark chocolate powder cuts through the sweet tang from the tomatoes and balances out the fiery heat from the chillies. You will also note that the cocoa helps to smooth out the chilli as it melts into the sauce - well worth a try!

chilli con carne in a bowl with rice, green chillies, soured cream and fresh coriander

🌯 Other Mexican recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

chilli con carne in a bowl with cannellini beans and rice.
Print

Mexican Chilli Con Carne Recipe (with cannellini beans)

This Mexican Chilli con carne recipe uses smoked paprika, ground cumin, chilli powder and tomatoes for the base of the sauce. These ingredients are combined and left to simmer gently for few hours reducing down and infusing to create a wonderfully rich and smokey sauce.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 492kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Onion finely chopped (200g)
  • 2 Garlic cloves finely chopped or minced
  • 2 celery sticks roughly chopped (120g)
  • 500 g mince meat ground meat
  • 1 teaspoon Smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon Hot chilli powder
  • 1 red chilli pepper deseeded and finely chopped (20g)
  • 2 tins chopped tomatoes
  • 200 g baby tomatoes halved
  • 2 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 1 beef stock cube
  • 1 red bell pepper deseeded and diced (130g)
  • 1 tablespoon Cocoa powder optional
  • 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce Lea and Perins (optional)
  • 1 tin of cannellini beans drained and rinsed
  • Handful of fresh coriander
  • Soured cream and extra sliced chillies to serve

Instructions

  • Pre heat oven to 160°C/320°F. Place a large wok or frying pan on medium heat. Add the olive oil, onion, minced garlic cloves and 2 roughly chopped celery sticks. Stir fry until the onions and celery are soft.
    ½ tablespoon Olive oil, 1 Onion, 2 Garlic cloves, 2 celery sticks
  • Next add the mince meat to the pan and roughly break up with a wooden spoon.
    500 g mince meat
  • As the meat starts to cook add smoked paprika, ground cumin, hot chilli powder and 1 finely chopped red chilli pepper.
    1 teaspoon Smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon Hot chilli powder, 1 red chilli pepper
  • Stir the spices into the meat and continue to cook until brown all over.
  • Next add the tinned tomatoes, baby tomatoes, tomato puree and 1 beef stock cube dissolved in a small amount of boiling water.
    2 tins chopped tomatoes, 200 g baby tomatoes, 2 tablespoon tomato puree, 1 beef stock cube
  • Stir well to combine all the ingredients then bring to a simmer and allow to cook gently for 5 minutes.
  • Then add the chopped red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon cocoa powder, and 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce.
    1 red bell pepper, 1 tablespoon Cocoa powder, 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • Next add 1 tin of cannellini beans, drained and rinsed. Mix together well and then cover with a lid or tin foil.
    1 tin of cannellini beans
  • Place in the centre of a preheated oven and cook at 160°C/320°F for 2 hours. Check and stir half way through. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 6-7 hours.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven. Stir through some freshly chopped coriander and serve in bowls with rice, fresh chillies and soured cream.
    Handful of fresh coriander, Soured cream and extra sliced chillies to serve

Video

Notes

Serving suggestions: Rice, fresh chillies, tobacco sauce, tortilla chips, avocado, guacamole, soured cream, grated cheese and fresh coriander.
Can you freeze this recipe? Once cooked allow to fully cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight or in the fridge for 24 hours.
Can you reheat cooked chilli? If the chilli has been cooled and then stored correctly (freezer for up to 3 months or fridge for up to 3 days) then it can be reheated. Reheat in the microwave or in a large pan on the stove until piping hot.
What can I use instead of kidney beans? Usually kidney beans are added to chilli - however, any bean will do. In this recipe I’ve used cannellini beans as I prefer the texture and colour.
Expert tips:
  • Use 2 chilli peppers or 2 teaspoon of hot chilli powder if you like your chilli super spicy
  • Instead of dissolving the stock cube in boiling water, try crumbling directly into the chilli so as not to water down the dish.
  • If you are short on time you can simmer the chilli on the stove for an hour or so instead of in the oven or slow cooker. However, for best results always cook in the oven.

Nutrition

Serving: 584g | Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 114g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 1170mg | Potassium: 427mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 90g | Vitamin A: 1914IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 75mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Jun 2017. Updated in Aug 2021 with an improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Mexican Chilli Con Carne (with cannellini beans) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/smokey-chilli-con-carne-cannellini/feed/ 8
Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/ https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/#respond Thu, 27 Oct 2016 14:07:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=18017 Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe With autumn comes the changing of the weather and leaves and...

Read More

The post Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes.

celery apple and walnut pesto in a bowl.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

With autumn comes the changing of the weather and leaves and the need for more comforting and warming dishes comes about. So its out with the basil and in with the celery leaf, out with the pine nuts and in with the walnut to create this delicious autumnal pesto. Celery and walnut pesto is less aromatic than a basil pesto recipe, with more of an earthy flavour. Its perfectly balanced to go with autumnal dishes such as roasted root veggies, baked sweet potatoes, warming and creamy lasagnas and even plump, little ravioli parcels.....there's plenty of ideas to go at.

The celery leaf is also great to use up in soup recipes: celery, apple and blue cheese garden soup post 

Celery, apple and walnut pesto drizzled over circles of baked sweet potato.

The autumnal vibe of this recipe was inspired by our latest trip to Italy. Did we eat a lot whilst we were there?.... Yes, of course, we ate a tonne. Did we care that we were meant to be there to plan our wedding and not eat all of Italy's pasta in one sitting? No, not one bit.

italy in autumn
Autumn sunrise, Peschiera del Garda

🥘 Ingredients

To make this walnut pesto recipe you will need:

  • Celery leaves roughly chopped
  • Walnut oil
  • Garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • Walnuts
  • Green apples cored and diced
  • Mint leaves
  • Edamame beans
  • Parmesan grated
  • Salt
  • Cider vinegar

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Celery leaves: can be replaced with celery stems but make sure to peel the outer edge to remove any stringy bits first.

Edamame beans: are optional but will add extra protein and give the pesto a more robust texture.

Walnuts: are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be pecans.

Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the celery leaves, garlic cloves, walnuts, chopped apples, mint leaves, beans, salt and cider vinegar into a blender or food processor. Add half of the water and half of the walnut oil.
  2. Pulse into a paste adding more water or oil if needed.
  3. Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
  4. Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.

Our wedding

But yes......our wedding!! Thats right - this massive thing that seems to be gobbling up my time at the moment, but something that I've failed to talk about on here. So next year, Ben and I will be married in the beautiful surroundings of the Italian countryside, following on from our engagement last year whilst we were in Pienza!

italy-in-autumn
Our wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Negrar.

Of course the plans so far for the wedding are lots of pasta, risotto, wine and a good bunch of laughter and happy times. Excited doesn't even begin to describe where I am at with this right now. There's still lots of planning to be sorted, and I'm sure a great deal of stress to cope with but I can't wait to get back to Italy next year and become Mrs Jones :-O

italy-in-autumn2
Our wedding hotel: Delsa, Verona

🍹Autumn holiday

But back to the trip we've just had: A holiday abroad in autumn is just simply magical. All the trees are changing and brandishing fiery reds or warming oranges, the mornings have a slight chill which brings a mysterious mist and subtle sunrises. The birds are also aware of the changes and migrate above the skies or dance in pretty patterns through the trees.

Grapevines are usually harvested for their annual fruits at this time of year, but some vineyards have vines that flower a little later so are still flush with huge bunches of juicy grapes. A glorious site and I really do hope that next year we can get wedding pictures amongst grapevines with cascading bunches of grapes 🙂

italy in autumn
Italian grapevines in Autumn at Peschiera del Garda
italy-in-autumn
Salo, Lake Garda, Italy in autumn
italy-in-autumn3
Peschiera del Garda, Italy in Autumn

The autumnal produce of Italy from peaches and beetroot to truffles and cabbage, meant that we had some stunning plates of food. Of course there was the usual mountain of cheese and cold cuts, but there was also plenty of inspiration for me with dishes like: sea bream baked with paprika and radicchio; suckling pig with apples, raisins and cabbage; shredded beetroot chutney; fresh pappardelle pasta with a creamy mushroom sauce and fresh truffle; the glorious and ubiquitous apricot breakfast tart; sea bream and lime tortelloni with burrata cheese; and of course walnut pesto. I just had to have a go at making my own version of this incredible pesto! 

💭 Expert tips

  • Only add half of the liquid ingredients (oil and water) to begin with. Blend and then check the consistency before adding more water or oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan separately then stir in to the blended pesto. This improves the texture and gives more control over the taste and amount of parmesan

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.

What to serve with walnut pesto?

This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish.

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

celery apple and walnut pesto in a bowl.
Print

Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto

Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes.
Course Appetizer, condiment, dip, party food, side, Snack
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 10 portions
Calories 211kcal

Ingredients

  • 100 g Celery leaves roughly chopped
  • 150 ml Walnut oil
  • 100 ml water
  • 2 Garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • 50 g Walnuts
  • 85 g Green apples cored and diced
  • 10 g Mint leaves
  • 50 g Edamame beans
  • 75 g Parmesan grated
  • Pinch of Salt
  • Teaspoon Cider vinegar

Instructions

  • Place the celery leaves, garlic cloves, walnuts, chopped apples, mint leaves, beans, salt and cider vinegar into a blender or food processor. Add half of the water and half of the walnut oil.
    100 g Celery leaves, 150 ml Walnut oil, 100 ml water, 2 Garlic cloves, 50 g Walnuts, 85 g Green apples, 10 g Mint leaves, 50 g Edamame beans, Pinch of Salt, Teaspoon Cider vinegar
  • Pulse into a paste adding more water or oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
    75 g Parmesan
  • Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.

Notes

How to store? Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.
What to serve with walnut pesto? This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish.
Celery leaves: can be replaced with celery stems but make sure to peel the outer edge to remove any stringy bits first.
Edamame beans: are optional but will add extra protein and give the pesto a more robust texture.
Walnuts: are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be pecans.
Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese.

Nutrition

Serving: 10portions | Calories: 211kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 12g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 143mg | Potassium: 97mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 158IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 100mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/feed/ 0
Apple Crumble https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/ https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/#respond Mon, 15 Mar 2021 22:51:59 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11689 Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard. - This is what Sundays are made for! This easy crumble recipe is made with crisp, Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes; from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden crumble out...

Read More

The post Apple Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard. - This is what Sundays are made for! This easy crumble recipe is made with crisp, Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes; from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden crumble out of the oven.

A portion of apply crumble on a small plate with custard drizzled over and the rest of the crumble in a larger dish with a spoon.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This apple crumble recipe is traditional, homemade and one the easiest yet most satisfying desserts I know. With a simple method that requires only 30 minutes, this is a great dessert for when you have mouths to feed and time to save!

Theres no need for any fancy equipment and no special skills required to make it look good. Just layering the apples and then crumble into a baking dish and popping into the oven until bubbling. Super simple.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this traditional apple crumble recipe you will need:

  • 100g plain flour
  • 75g ground almonds
  • 100g golden caster sugar
  • 100g cold, cubed, unsalted butter
  • pinch of salt
  • 500g peeled and chopped cooking apples
  • 2 tablespoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon (optional)
  • 25g roasted chopped hazelnuts (optional)

Ingredient notes

Ground almonds: These are used to give extra flavour to the crumble, However, if you would rather not use almonds then just replace with the same amount of plain flour. Meaning the total flour would be 175g.

Apples: Use cooking apples.

Cinnamon: This warming spice goes fantastically well with the stewed apples. But if you prefer you can leave this out or substitute with nutmeg or allspice.

Hazelnuts: Optional - leave out if you prefer. I like to use chopped hazelnuts to add to the crunch and the flavour of the topping.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan).
    Prepare the crumble: Add 100g plain flour, 75g ground almonds, 100g golden caster sugar, 100g cubed unsalted butter and a pinch of salt to a mixing bowl. Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the rest of the ingredients until like breadcrumbs. Then place to one side while you prepare the apples. 
  2. Peel the apples, remove the core and then cut the flesh into rough 1cm cubes. Transfer the cubed apple to a 21cm (8 inch) pie dish and then add 2 tablespoon honey and 1 teaspoon cinnamon. Mix together well until the apple is fully coated in the honey and cinnamon
  3. Next take the crumble mix and evenly scatter over the apple until the entire surface is covered. 
    For extra crunch sprinkle over some chopped hazelnuts (optional).
  4. Place the pie dish in the preheated oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the crumble is golden and the apple is bubbling.
    Serve with custard.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.

💭 Expert tips

  • Crumble topping: Crumble is usually a mixture of flour, butter and sugar. For this recipe I've also added ground almonds for extra flavour and chopped hazelnuts for extra crunch. However, both of these ingredients are optional. If you would prefer a nut-free option just replace the ground almonds with the same amount of flour and leave out the hazelnuts.
  • Filling: The filling in this recipe is a chunky filling. This means that the cubed apples hold their shape. For a smooth filling stew the apples before placing in the pie dish. To do this add the apples to a pan with butter and cook gently until soft. Mash up until smooth then transfer to the pie dish and add the crumble.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What apples are best for crumble?

Bramley cooking apples are the best option for using in a crumble. These deliciously, crisp, bright green apples are generally larger with a more sour taste than your standard eating apple. They are ideal for any kind of dessert as when baked they stew down almost immediately into a fluffy apple sauce perfect for using in crumbles, apple pies and apple turnovers.

Cooking apples are also a great option for making homemade apple sauce to go with your roast beef dinner

Can the crumble be made with oats?

Using oats instead of flour is a great alternative, especially if you want to make this recipe gluten free (do double check the label to ensure that the oats you use are completely gluten free). To make this recipe with oats simply replace the flour with same amount of oats.

Is apple crisp and apple crumble the same thing?

In the UK apple crisp and and crumble are the same thing and in fact the term apple crisp isn't generally used. In the US 'apple crisp' is a crumble made out of sugar and oats only, and 'apple crumble', is the same as the standard UK crumble made with butter, flour and sugar.

How to store?

Once baked and cooled the crumble should be covered and then stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can briefly reheat the crumble in either the oven or microwave.

Can you freeze apple crumble?

Apple crumble is best frozen before it has been baked. Once you have made up the crumble in a pie dish, wrap in cling film and then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Throughly defrost in the fridge overnight before baking as instructed in this recipe.

Round baking dish filled with apple crumble and topped with chopped hazelnuts, and baking apples the background.

🍨 Other dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A portion of apply crumble on a small plate with custard drizzled over and the rest of the crumble in a larger dish with a spoon.
Print

Apple Crumble

Apple crumble baked fresh at home with lashings of custard - this is what Sundays are made for! This easy apple crumble recipe is made with crisp Bramley apples tossed in cinnamon, then baked with a simple crumble and hazelnut topping. Ready in 30 minutes from peeling the apples to pulling a bubbling, golden apple crumble out of the oven.
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 407kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • 21cm (8 inch) pie dish

Ingredients

  • 100 g plain flour
  • 75 g ground almonds
  • 100 g golden caster sugar
  • 100 g cold unsalted butter (cubed)
  • pinch of salt
  • 500 g peeled and chopped cooking apples
  • 2 tablespoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • 25 g roasted chopped hazelnuts (optional)

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Prepare the crumble in a large mixing bowl. Add 100g plain flour, 75g ground almonds, 100g golden caster sugar, 100g cubed unsalted butter and a pinch of salt to the bowl.
  • Use your finger tips to rub the butter into the rest of the ingredients until like breadcrumbs. Then place to one side while you prepare the apples.
  • Peel the apples, remove the core and then cut the flesh into rough 1cm cubes. Transfer the cubed apple to a pie dish and then add 2 tablespoon honey and 1 teaspoon cinnamon. Mix together well until the apple is fully coated in the honey and cinnamon
  • Next take the crumble mix and evenly scatter over the apple until the entire surface is covered. For extra crunch sprinkle over some chopped hazelnuts (optional).
  • Place the pie dish in the preheated oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the crumble is golden and the apple is bubbling. Serve with custard.

Video

Notes

Can the crumble be made with oats? Apple crumble made with oats instead of flour is a great alternative if you want to make this recipe gluten free (do double check that the oats you use are completely gluten free and not packaged alongside wheat containing products). To make this recipe with oats simply replace the flour with same amount of oats.
How to store? Once baked and cooled the crumble should be covered and then stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can briefly reheat the crumble in either the oven or microwave.
Can apple crumble be frozen? Apple crumble is best frozen before it has been baked. Once you have made up the crumble in a pie dish, wrap in cling film and then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Throughly defrost in the fridge overnight before baking as instructed in this recipe.
Expert tips:
  • Crumble topping: Crumble is usually a mixture of flour, butter and sugar. For this recipe I've also added ground almonds for extra flavour and chopped hazelnuts for extra crunch. However, both of these ingredients are optional. If you would prefer a nut-free option just replace the ground almonds with the same amount of flour and leave out the hazelnuts.
  • Filling: The filling in this recipe is a chunky filling. This means that the cubed apples hold their shape. For a smooth filling stew the apples before placing in the pie dish. To do this add the apples to a pan with butter and cook gently until soft. Mash up until smooth then transfer to the pie dish and add the crumble.

Nutrition

Serving: 155g | Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 145mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 32g | Vitamin A: 463IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in December 2019. Updated in March 2021 with expert tips.

The post Apple Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/apple-crumble/feed/ 0
Banana Birthday Cake (Recipe Video + Step-by-Step Guide) https://properfoodie.com/banana-birthday-cake/ https://properfoodie.com/banana-birthday-cake/#comments Tue, 07 Aug 2018 21:32:51 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7241 Banana Birthday Cake with creamy mascarpone filling. Banana cake is a simple recipe and a great birthday cake option for those looking to change up that classic Victoria sponge or over indulgent chocolate cake. Banana Birthday Cake This is Banana bread birthday cake sandwiched with thick vanilla mascarpone cream,  a drizzle of honey and a...

Read More

The post Banana Birthday Cake (Recipe Video + Step-by-Step Guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Banana Birthday Cake with creamy mascarpone filling. Banana cake is a simple recipe and a great birthday cake option for those looking to change up that classic Victoria sponge or over indulgent chocolate cake.

banana celebration cake

Banana Birthday Cake

This is Banana bread birthday cake sandwiched with thick vanilla mascarpone cream,  a drizzle of honey and a dusting of icing. Its a celebration cake I could definitely eat all to myself! - and if I'm honest - a lot of it did come my way 🙂 Theres just no way I could resist that moist, crumbly sponge intertwined with banana and topped with a lusciously, naughty mascarpone cream. JUST TOO GOOD. Theres no holding me back when it comes to a good old dessert. Some of my favourites, other than this fabulous cake are blueberry pancakes, Healthy Pancakes Recipe (with Banana and Oats), apple crumble, chocolate muffins, peanut butter and chocolate biscuit squares and Bakewell tart.

That said, a banana cake recipe is perfect for birthdays or celebratory milestones - for me that milestone was my recipe videos! Unbelievably, in August 2018 I had been making recipe videos for a whole year! So in celebratory, Birthday style I made this tasty and moist, layered banana bread cake.

To add to the milestone I was also marking a year of working with Zoom Media. Zoom help to produce some of my videos and then display them on the TV screens they manage in UK gyms. (If your here after seeing one of my videos in a gym - thanks so much for stopping by 🙂 ). Its a working relationship that is still on going and I hope to be able to provide many more videos in the future.

Banana cake

This easy banana cake recipe isn't just good for celebrations but its pretty much good for whatever you fancy. Friends coming round? Need dessert for after your Sunday roast? Going to a party and want to show up with a homemade cake? - This easy bake is your answer. Whats more, its great for using up those slightly squishy, browned, leftover bananas. What once was fit for the bin can be revived into something fabulous.

Banana not your thing? Have a little look at my salted caramel popcorn cake!

banana birthday cake

Is banana cake and banana bread the same?

Banana cake and banana bread are pretty much the same thing. Banana bread isn't really a bread as it doesn't require yeast, or time to rise and contains plenty of sugar. However, when baked in a loaf tin and left naked, without any of the banana cake icing or frosting, then it automatically becomes banana bread. The banana cake on the other hand, is called a cake due to it not being a loaf shape and usually having frosted filling or toppings. Much like carrot cake, the banana cake almost always has to have a delicious frosting. But strangely enough carrot cake is always carrot cake, with our without frosting. Some people may also argue that the banana cake uses softer flour than the banana loaf, but this comes down to preference and generally the types of flours can be interchanged between these two recipes anyway.

Banana Cake ingredients

Banana cake and banana loaf recipes require just a few basic store cupboard ingredients and of course a few over ripe bananas:

  • Butter
  • light brown sugar
  • Cinnamon
  • Large eggs
  • Self raising flour
  • Ripe bananas
  • Vanilla extract
  • Extra banana and honey to decorate

Banana cake frosting ingredients

  • Double cream
  • Seeds from half a vanilla pod
  • Mascarpone cream cheese
  • Icing sugar

How to make banana cake at home

  1. Pre heat oven to 180 degrees C,  and line an 8 inch round baking tin wth baking paper. See how to line a baking tin here.
  2. By hand or in a stand mixer cream together the butter, sugar and cinnamon until light and soft. See recipe tip below
  3. Whisk together the eggs then add a little flour to the mix and gradually add the whisked eggs whisk continuing to mix.
  4. Once all the egg has been added to the cake mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer and add in the rest of the flour, the vanilla extract and 2 mashed bananas. Then use a spatula to gently fold together the banana cake mix.Add vanilla extract and carefully fold together the banana cake mix
  5. Next transfer the banana cake mix to the line cake tin and bake in the centre of the oven for 50 minutes. Check at 40 minutes. Cake is ready when an inserted skewer comes out clean.Transfer the banana cake mix to a lined cake tin

Recipe tip: Cream the butter and sugar for at least 5 minutes in the stand mix and at least 10 minutes by hand. A creamy and light cake mix will ensure a lighter and crumbly cake.

How to make the best creamy banana cake frosting

  1. Place the cream, vanilla pod seeds, mascarpone cream cheese, and icing sugar into a large mixing bowl and mix together well with a wooden spoon. The mix should be of a spreadable consistency but not overly whisked.in a bowl mix together the cream mascarpone and vanilla pod seeds
  2. taste test and add more icing or vanilla if required. Cover and place in the fridge until you are ready to assemble to cake.
  3. To assemble the cake, slice the cooled cake in half horizontally. Place the top half to one side.  bake and cool and then slice in half
  4. IMPORTANT TIP: Only add the mascarpone filling and topping once the cake is completely cool, otherwise the heat will melt the mascarpone cream.
  5. Spread half of the cream frosting over the bottom half of the cake, then carefully transfer the top of the cake onto the bottom half.spread half of the cream cheese filling onto the bottom layer
  6. Spread the remaining frosting over the top of the cake.Top the cake with the remaining half of cream cheese frosting
  7. Then decorate with freshly chopped banana, honey and a dusting of icing sugar.decorate with freshly sliced banana and honey

How long will banana cake keep?

Banana cake will keep and stay fresh for around 2 days at room temperature. Just ensure that the cake is stored in a air tight container. If stored in a container and then placed in the fridge the cake will last slightly longer and you may get 5-6 days out of it.

Can you freeze banana cake?

Banana cake without frosting or icing will freeze well. Once the cake has cooled completely, leave whole and wrap with 2 layers of cling film then place in the freezer. The cake will keep for up to 3 months in the freezer. When you're ready to use it, defrost over night at room temperature and then add the mascarpone cream cheese filling and frosting the following day.

birthday banana and cream cake

A delicious easy to make cake that is sure to have your guests coming back for more. Happy baking!!

 2 hours 15 minutes to makevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

banana celebration cake
Print

Banana Birthday Cake

Banana Cake with mascarpone frosting. Perfect for birthdays and for a change to that classic Victoria sponge or over indulgent chocolate cake
Course birthday, Dessert, Snack
Cuisine British
Prep Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 10 people
Calories 601kcal

Ingredients

For the cake

  • 150 g butter cubed and at room temp
  • 200 g light brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • 3 large eggs
  • 250 g self-raising flour
  • 2 bananas peeled and mashed
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

For the mascarpone cream filling and topping

  • 300 ml Double cream
  • Seeds from half a vanilla pod
  • 250 g mascarpone cheese
  • 75 g icing sugar

Extra toppings

  • 1 sliced banana
  • 2 teaspoon runny honey

Equipment

  • 20 cm/8inch round cake tin lined with greaseproof paper
  • Stand mixer or mix by hand
  • Spatula
  • Serrated knife and Palette knife for cutting the cake into 2 layers and for adding the cream.

Instructions

To make the cake

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C Fan.
  • First line your cake tin with greaseproof paper (link: how to line a tin)
    preparing a baking tin with grease proof paper
  • Place the cubed butter, sugar and cinnamon in a large bowl or mixer stand. Cream together until light and soft – leave the mixer on high for at least 5 minutes to achieve a nice creamy consistency. Alternatively cream together by hand and mix for at least 10 minutes until light and creamy
  • Next whisk together the 3 eggs. The eggs are to be added to the butter mix gradually – I usually add a quarter at a time along with a little flour to help prevent the mixture from splitting.
  • Once all the egg has been combined into the mix, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Peel 2 bananas and mash with a fork.
    Mash bananas with a fork
  • Next add the remaining flour, mashed bananas and vanilla extract to the cake mix. Use a spatula to fold and gently combine together.
    Add vanilla extract and carefully fold together the banana cake mix
  • Transfer the cake mixture to the line cake tin and use the spatula to even out the top of the mix once it’s in the tin. Place the tin in the centre of a pre heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes but check after 40 minutes. Check if the cake is ready by inserting a metal skewer into the centre of the cake – the cake is done when the skewer comes out clean.
    Transfer the banana cake mix to a lined cake tin
  • Once the cake is baked, remove from the oven and leave on the side, in the tin to cool for at least 20 minutes. Meanwhile, make the mascarpone cream filling and topping:

To make the mascarpone cream

  • Place double cream, vanilla pod seeds, mascarpone and icing sugar in a large mixing bowl. Use a wooden spoon to combine together. Don't over mix as the mixture will become to stiff and won't spread easily over the cake.
    in a bowl mix together the cream mascarpone and vanilla pod seeds
  • Taste test and add more icing/vanilla if desired. Cover and place in the fridge until you’re ready to assemble the cake.

Building the cake

  • After 20 minutes the cake should be cool enough to remove from the tin. Place on a wire rack and leave for a further 30 minutes to ensure it has cooled right the way through.
    IMPORTANT TIP: If the cake is still warm the mascarpone cream will melt!
  • Once the cake is fully cool, use a large serrated knife to carefully slice into two layers. Move the knife around the cake to ensure an even cut. Place the top half of the cake on a plate and put to one side for the moment.
    bake and cool and then slice in half
  • Remove the mascarpone cream from the fridge. Use a palette knife to smoother half of the cream mix over the bottom layer of the cake. You don’t need to be too neat but do try to get the cream right the edges of the cake so that I will be visible when the top layer goes on.
    spread half of the cream cheese filling onto the bottom layer
  • Carefully place the top layer of the cake over the cream and then use the palette knife to smooth the remaining cream over the top of the cake.
    Top the cake with the remaining half of cream cheese frosting
  • Finally top the cake with sliced banana and drizzle of honey and serve. Keep in the fridge if not serving immediately.
    serving banana cake

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 161g | Calories: 601kcal | Carbohydrates: 53.8g | Protein: 6.5g | Fat: 41.6g | Saturated Fat: 25.8g | Sodium: 240mg | Sugar: 33.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Banana Birthday Cake with mascarpone cream and banana topping

The post Banana Birthday Cake (Recipe Video + Step-by-Step Guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/banana-birthday-cake/feed/ 18
Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/#comments Wed, 14 Feb 2018 01:05:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6026 Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less...

Read More

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less than 45 minutes.

Ribollita vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

I'm back dreaming of the those rolling Toscana hills again - I can't help it. I always seem to come back to Italy when I'm cooking from the heart. And this dish really is from the heart. Its a homemade vegetable and bean soup - plain and simple. But this recipe has so much depth, flavour and tradition, that you know it just has to taste amazing.

Why make this recipe?

Tuscan Bean soup comes from making simple foods go a long way and also making sure that those simple foods don't go to waste. Some leftover carrots or celery? chuck em in. Some stale bread? Yep that goes in too! Its all about making the most of what you have and turning leftovers into a meal fit for a king.

This is the perfect recipe for the end of the week when you may have leftovers or food that needs to be used up. Its also really easy to make and super healthy - whats not to like?

If you're after some more Italian flavour and flare have a quick peek at my Amarone Risotto, or my homemade tiramisu, or how about a salami ragu? or if you're feeling really adventurous why not have a go at making your own pasta?

Ingredients

For this Tuscan ribollita soup recipe you will need a few simple ingredients, many of which are cupboard staples or possible leftovers.

Ingredients needed to make this recipe displayed on a table with text labels

Kale: Traditionally this recipe is made with black kale but any kind of kale or cabbage will work well here. I usually add the kale or cabbage at the very end and gently warm for 5 minutes so allowing it to soften whilst maintaining its colour and nutrients.

Parmesan: Freshly grated parmesan or pecorino is simply wonderful in this recipe. It adds a great depth of flavour and lovely a creamy texture. However, if you want to keep this soup strictly vegetarian then make sure to replace with a vegetarian cheese. Or if you want a super healthy vegetable soup then just skip the cheese.

Beans: Cannellini beans work well here as they are white and pearly and stand out against the other ingredients. They are also easy to blend down and so help to create a creamy soup without adding cream, milk, yogurt or cheese. Any other kind of white bean will work just as well.

Vine tomatoes: For the tomatoes I like to use baby vine tomatoes, which are slightly sweeter than the larger version. However, either the baby or the large variety work just as well. Either use two large vine tomatoes sliced and deseeded or weight out around 140g of baby vine tomatoes.

Step-by-Step Instructions

  1. Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook.
  2. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  3. After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for a 2-3 minutes.
  4. Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth.A collage of 4 images showing how to make White bean soup step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well.
  6. Stir in the black kale or cabbage. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  7. Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.
  8. TIP: To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.A collage of 4 images showing how to make white bean soup step by step for instructions 5-8.
Is ribollita soup healthy?

Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!

What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?

You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Why does this recipe use stale bread?

To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens it.

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up a bowl and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

Other soup recipes you might like:

📖 Recipe

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.
Print

Tuscan Ribollita Soup

Italian Ribollita soup is a creamy, healthy, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Main Course, starter
Cuisine Italian, Mediterranean
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 298kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tbsp. Olive oil
  • 1 large onion 200g finely chopped
  • 1 Leek 80g chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 carrot 150g finely chopped
  • 2 celery 100g sticks finely chopped
  • 2 medium vine tomatoes deseeded and roughly cubed 140g
  • 600 ml vegetable stock plus extra water if required
  • 2 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 tin cannellini beans 240g drained
  • 20 g freshly grated parmesan or vegetarian alternative
  • 100 g black kale or cabbage

Optional

  • Sea salt black pepper and extra parmesan to season
  • Ciabatta or stale bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  • After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well. Stir in the black kale. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  • Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.

Video

Notes

Recipe tip:
To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.
Is ribollita soup healthy?
Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!
What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?
You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 298kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 800mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 19g

This post was first published in February 2018. Updated in January 2021 with new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/feed/ 42
Creamy Mushroom Pasta (Step-by-Step Guide + Video) https://properfoodie.com/creamy-mushroom-pasta/ https://properfoodie.com/creamy-mushroom-pasta/#respond Tue, 11 Jun 2019 20:49:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10175 Creamy mushroom pasta is a one pan pasta recipe with white wine cream sauce, chestnut mushrooms, fresh parsley, and parmesan cheese! Try this vegetarian pasta recipe for lunch or dinner. Creamy mushroom pasta This easy mushroom pasta is for the evenings when we require nothing more than a scrumptious bowl of creamy pasta. Its for...

Read More

The post Creamy Mushroom Pasta (Step-by-Step Guide + Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy mushroom pasta is a one pan pasta recipe with white wine cream sauce, chestnut mushrooms, fresh parsley, and parmesan cheese! Try this vegetarian pasta recipe for lunch or dinner.

creamy mushroom pasta

Creamy mushroom pasta

This easy mushroom pasta is for the evenings when we require nothing more than a scrumptious bowl of creamy pasta. Its for the evenings when cooking is not high on the agenda and one pot dishes like easy pea pasta, healthy salmon and prawn linguine or spicy cajun chicken pasta are the answer to all our dinner questions.

Creamy mushroom pasta is as easy to make as it gets. The mouth-watering combination of chestnut mushrooms with white wine cream sauce, creme fraiche and parmesan makes this dish a real crowd pleaser.

For something a little meatier, try this equally as creamy fettuccini alfredo with chicken with homemade alfredo sauce recipe.

creamy mushroom pasta

Creamy mushroom pasta ingredients

To make this mushroom pasta with cream sauce, you will need:

  • Butter
  • Finely chopped onion
  • Garlic clove
  • Plain flour
  • Chestnut/shiitake mushrooms (or other type of mushrooms)
  • White wine
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Parmesan (or other choice of hard cheese)
  • Spaghetti (or other pasta)
  • Dijon mustard (optional)
  • Creme Fraiche
  • Freshly chopped parsley

mushroom pasta in white wine cream sauce

Creamy mushroom sauce

To make the ultimate creamy mushroom sauce, you will first need to make a soft and silky white sauce.

This requires 5 minutes of patience to slowly combine butter, flour and milk, and gently cook until thick and creamy. Making this sauce extra special and full of flavour requires some key ingredients, which pair fantastically well with the chestnut mushrooms.

The first is a few good glugs of white wine, which creates an incredible scent of pears and apples as soon as it hits the hot pan. Cook the wine gently for a few minutes to allow the alcohol to burn off before the milk is added.

Towards the end of cooking, the parmesan, dijon mustard and creme fraiche are stirred into the sauce to ensure a full flavoured, creamy and satisfying finish to the dish. White wine cream sauce adds so much flavour to this mushroom pasta recipe.

mushroom pasta

How to make creamy mushroom pasta

To make this simple pasta recipe, follow these steps:

  1. In large pan melt butter and fry garlic and onions until soft.
  2. Then add the mushrooms and cook for further 2 minutesstir fry onions an mushrooms
  3. Add flour and stir in before adding a splash of white wine and the gradually adding milk. Stir until the white wine cream sauce starts to to thicken add flour then wine and then gradually add milk
  4. Next add parmesan, dijon mustard, creme fraiche and seasoning to the sauce and stir in well.add dijon mustard
  5. Finally add cooked spaghetti and stir to coat in the sauce, then top with extra parmesan and fresh parsley. add cooked spaghetti and stir to fully coat in sauce

What to serve with this recipe

The best thing to serve with this creamy pasta recipe is warm sprouted grain bread, perfect for dunking and mopping up the mushroom sauce.  You could also pair this dish with a side of garlic parmesan roasted carrots or a fresh vegetable salad with creamy balsamic dressing.

And, for an extra special treat, why not make this mushroom pasta recipe with your own homemade pasta?

creamy mushroom pasta

What else can I cook with mushrooms?

Love mushrooms? Try this simple, yet incredible Hungarian mushroom soup. Or try this amazing truffle linguine dish and find out where you can buy fabulously, authentic truffle paste, straight from Italy. For more dinner inspiration check out my dinner ideas for two collection.

 30 minutes to produce recipehigh in nutrients recipe2 of 5 fruit and veg a day recipe

📖 Recipe

creamy mushroom pasta
Print

Creamy Mushroom Pasta

Creamy mushroom pasta cooked in one pan with a white wine cream sauce, served with fresh parsley and grated parmesan.
Course Dinner, evening meal, Main Course
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 734.1kcal

Ingredients

  • 15 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 100g
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 300 g Chestnut/shiitake mushrooms or other type of mushrooms
  • 100 ml White wine
  • 300 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 30 g Grated parmesan or other choice of hard cheese
  • 300 g Uncooked Spaghetti 580g cooked
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard optional
  • 1 tablespoon Creme Fraiche
  • 30 g Freshly chopped parsley handful

Instructions

  • In large pan melt butter and gently fry garlic and onions until soft. Add mushrooms and stir fry for further 2 minutes or until just starting to soften.
    stir fry onions an mushrooms
  • Sprinkle flour over the mushrooms and stir in well. Some flour may start to stick to the base of the pan at this point.
  • Next add the wine and scrape up any bits of flour. As the wine reduces it will mix with the flour and start to thicken.
  • As the wine thickens start to add the milk a little at a time whilst continually staring. The gradual additions of milk and continual stirring will prevent any lumps forming and will create a silky smooth white sauce.
    add flour then wine and then gradually add milk
  • Once all the milk is added continue to stir and allow to simmer for a couple of minutes to ensure the flour is cooked out and the sauce is fully thickened.
  • Next add parmesan, dijon mustard, creme fraiche and seasoning to the sauce and stir in well.
    add dijon mustard
  • Finally add cooked spaghetti and stir to coat in the sauce, then top with extra parmesan and fresh parsley.
    add cooked spaghetti and stir to fully coat in sauce

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 742g | Calories: 734.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 115g | Protein: 27.3g | Fat: 18.2g | Saturated Fat: 10.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4.2g | Sodium: 240mg | Fiber: 7.6g | Sugar: 15.8g

I first shared this Creamy mushroom pasta recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

PIN FOR LATER

creamy mushroom pasta

The post Creamy Mushroom Pasta (Step-by-Step Guide + Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/creamy-mushroom-pasta/feed/ 0
Chicken and leeks recipe https://properfoodie.com/chicken-and-leek-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-and-leek-recipe/#comments Sat, 17 Aug 2019 08:38:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10629 A simple chicken and leeks recipe made with creamy mustard and tarragon sauce. Perfect for a Saturday night in or as an easy Sunday dinner idea!  This tasty leek dish is also great as a base for chicken leek pie or leek and chicken pasta recipes! This incredibly easy chicken and leeks recipe is already...

Read More

The post Chicken and leeks recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A simple chicken and leeks recipe made with creamy mustard and tarragon sauce. Perfect for a Saturday night in or as an easy Sunday dinner idea!  This tasty leek dish is also great as a base for chicken leek pie or leek and chicken pasta recipes!

chicken and leek recipe

This incredibly easy chicken and leeks recipe is already winging its way to the top of my list of favourites; and with good reason. Its creamy, but not unhealthy, filling but not heavy, and fragrant but not overpowering. Pretty much your perfect chicken dinner.

The basis of this classic recipe is a creamy chicken and leek broth infused with sweet tarragon and spicy mustard seeds. I could eat it all day just as it is, but the joy of this recipe is that it can also be used as the starting point for many other chicken and leek recipes. Recipes with chicken are so versatile but there is something special about this delicious sauce and tarragon chicken. 

If your after chicken thats a little less saucy, why not try my easy roast chicken recipe? or for more dinner inspiration check out my dinner ideas for two collection.

Chicken and Leeks Recipe Ingredients

For this delightful chicken and leeks recipe you will need:

  • Oil
  • Chicken breasts
  • Salt and pepper
  • Lemon juice
  • Leeks
  • Garlic
  • Plain flour
  • Chicken stock
  • Milk
  • Wholegrain mustard
  • Creme fraiche
  • Fresh tarragon

TIP: Leeks are a delicious vegetable full of wonderful flavour, but they are grown in the ground in sandy soil. They need a good cleaning before you use them for cooking. If you’re not sure how to clean leeks, it’s easy—give them a good rinse under cold water to remove dirt or sand.

TIP-Creme Fraiche: You may substitute sour cream or plain yogurt for creme fraiche if you are unable to find it.

You could also use ramps to put a spin on your chicken and leek recipes by making this a ramps recipe. What are ramps: ramps are essentially wild leeks with a strong, delicious flavour similar to onions that’s stronger than leeks.

What herbs go with chicken?

Chicken goes well with so many herbs, in particular rosemary, garlic, thyme, oregano and coriander. It also works really well with tarragon, which is what is used in this chicken and leek recipe. The sweet aniseed flavour of tarragon also works really well with the creamy, mustard flavoured chicken and leek broth. I use a similar combination of flavours in my mustard and tarragon chicken bliss recipe.

How to Cook Leeks with Chicken

  1. First prepare the chicken: Place cling film under and over the chicken breasts and the bash with a rolling pin to flatten the meat to around half a cm in thickness.flatten chicken breasts with a rolling pin
  2. Drizzle oil over the chicken and then season with salt, pepper and lemon juice
  3. Place a large frying pan on the heat and then add the chicken breasts. Cook on each side for 2-3 minutes or until golden brown. Then remove from the pan and set to one side.pan fry chicken breast until golden on both sides
  4. Next prepare the chicken and leek broth: Using the same pan, add a little more oil and then gently fry the chopped leeks
  5. Whilst the leeks are cooking add some finely chopped garlic and stir in well.pan fry chopped leeks and garlic
  6. Once the leeks have softened stir in 2 tablespoon flour and then gradually add the stock and milk.stir in stock
  7. When the broth starts to simmer return the chicken to the pan and cook with the lid on for 20 minutes.return the chicken to the pan
  8. After 20 minutes remove the lid and stir 1 teaspoon of wholegrain mustard and 3 tablespoon of creme fraiche into the chicken and leek broth.stir creme fraiche into Chicken and leek recipe
  9. Finish by stirring in some fresh tarragon leaves.stir in fresh tarragon leaves
  10. Serve with your choice of veg or potatoes.serve the chicken and leeks with your choice of veg or potatoes

What can I make with chicken and leeks?

This recipe can be used as the starting point to create a variety of chicken and leek recipes. This includes: chicken and leek pie, chicken and leek soup and chicken and leek pasta. For the chicken leek pie and chicken leek soup the cooked chicken will need to be removed and shredded and the remaining ingredients should be reduced down for the pie or blended (smooth or chunky) for the soup. The chicken can also be shredded for chicken leek pasta but also works with the whole breast served on top of the pasta.

What to Eat with Chicken and Leeks

This recipe works really well with a simple vegetable accompaniment such as green vegetable salad, green bean almondine or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. Chicken and leeks also goes amazingly well with any type of potato, try it with foil pack potatoes or Irish mashed potatoes.

chicken and leek recipe

Chicken breast recipes for dinner are so versatile and a perfect solution when you are looking for easy dinner ideas for the family. Try this simple chicken and leeks recipe at home for your next cosy night in – you won’t be disappointed.

📖 Recipe

chicken and leeks
Print

Chicken and leek recipe

A simple chicken and leek recipe made with flavoursome broth, perfect as it is for an easy dinner or use as a tasty base for chicken pie or chicken and leek pasta.
Course Dinner, Main Course, tea
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 286.1kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon Oil
  • 4 Chicken breasts (575g)
  • Salt and pepper
  • Juice from half a lemon
  • 2 Leeks quartered length ways and then roughly chopped (275g)
  • 1 clove Garlic finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 450 ml Chicken stock
  • 150 ml semi skimmed Milk
  • 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard
  • 3 tablespoon Creme fraiche
  • Handful fresh tarragon leaves (20g)

Instructions

First prepare the chicken:

  • Place cling film under and over the chicken breasts and the bash with a rolling pin to flatten the meat to around half a cm in thickness.
  • Drizzle oil over one side of the chicken and then season with salt, pepper and lemon juice. Flip the chicken over and repeat.
  • Place a large frying pan on the heat and then add the chicken breasts. Cook on each side for 2-3 minutes or until golden brown. Then remove from the pan and set to one side.

Next prepare the chicken and leek broth

  • Using the same pan, add a little more oil and then gently fry the chopped leeks.
  • Whilst the leeks are cooking add some finely chopped garlic and stir in well.
  • Once the leeks have softened, stir in 2 tablespoon flour and then gradually add the stock and milk.
  • When the broth starts to simmer return the chicken to the pan and cook with the lid on for 20 minutes.
  • After 20 minutes remove the lid and stir 1 teaspoon of wholegrain mustard and 3 tablespoon of creme fraiche into the chicken and leek broth.
  • Finish by stirring in some fresh tarragon leaves before serving with your choice of veg or potatoes.

Video

Notes

Click here to see traffic light nutritional info for this recipe
TIP: Leeks are a delicious vegetable full of wonderful flavour, but they are grown in the ground in sandy soil. They need a good cleaning before you use them for cooking. If you’re not sure how to clean leeks, it’s easy—give them a good rinse under cold water to remove dirt or sand.
TIP-Creme Fraiche: You may substitute sour cream or plain yogurt for creme fraiche if you are unable to find it.
You could also use ramps to put a spin on your chicken and leek recipes by making this a ramps recipe. What are ramps: ramps are essentially wild leeks with a strong, delicious flavour similar to onions that’s stronger than leeks.

Nutrition

Serving: 391g | Calories: 286.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 9.6g | Protein: 40.6g | Fat: 9.7g | Saturated Fat: 3.9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 440mg | Fiber: 0.6g | Sugar: 3.7g

I first shared this Chicken and leeks recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site where I am a contributor.

The post Chicken and leeks recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-and-leek-recipe/feed/ 11
Cinnamon Swirls https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/ https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/#respond Thu, 12 Nov 2020 22:18:57 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16341 Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post Cinnamon Swirls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough and theres no need for a dough hook or bread machine! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea.

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows with icing on the top and one roll broken off with a bite taken.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

These rather impressive looking cinnamon swirls are actually really easy to make. With a foolproof method and 10 minute dough recipe that produces soft and fluffy rolls every time.

You don't need a bread machine and theres no need to activate the yeast before adding it to the flour. This is a simple method of adding wet ingredients to dry and bringing it all together into the most perfect and fluffy cinnamon swirls.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a 9x9 inch tin of Cinnamon rolls (9 rolls in a tin) you will need:

Ingredients needed to make nine cinnamon swirls, all lined up side by side in individual bowls

Ingredient notes

Strong white bread flour: Its quite important that the right kind of flour is used for this recipe. Strong bread flour (or just bread flour if you are in the US) contains a higher amount of protein, which will allow for more air to be trapped when the dough rises and bakes. Therefore, producing a light, soft and fluffy cinnamon roll.

Dark brown sugar: Soft dark brown sugar works best in this recipe as it easily mixes and dissolves into the butter. The brown sugar also has a lovely toffee flavour and the darker colour makes the swirl stand out more against the plain bread. Light brown muscovado sugar would also work well here.

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.

Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.

Caster sugar: The caster sugar (or bakers sugar) is added to the dough to make the bread sweet. Although other types of sugar could be used here, I find caster sugar to be the best as it dissolves quickly and produces a nice even flavour throughout the bread. Either white or brown caster sugar can be used.

Icing - Topping the swirls with icing is completely optional, but I feel icing is a must when it comes to cinnamon swirls. Icing can be piped or drizzled on. Or if you prefer you can add more water to make a thinner icing and then brush over the swirls to create an icing glaze.

If you aren't a fan of icing you could create an apricot glaze instead. To do this heat half a jar of apricot jam in a small pan until its nice and runny. Then brush the jam over the cinnamon swirls after they have been taken out of the oven and whilst they are still warm.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Melt the butter and milk over a low heat in a small pan.
  2. In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt.
  3. Gradually pour the melted butter and milk into the dry ingredients. Stir well between each addition to eventually form a dough.
  4. Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 2-3 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.4 images showing steps 1-4 for making Cinnamon rolls: 1. Melt butter into milk in a pan, 2. mix flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt, 3. pour pan mixture into dry ingredients and form a dough, 4. Turn out and knead dough.
  5. Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover.
  6. Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  7. Meanwhile mix together the dark brown sugar and cinnamon. Put to one side.
  8. After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Then flour a rolling pin and roll into a rough rectangle 2-3mm thick.4 images showing steps 5-8 for making Cinnamon rolls: 5. Place dough in oiled bowl and cover, 6. leave to rise to double in size, 7. mix cinnamon and dark brown sugar, 8. roll out dough into rectangle 2-3 mm thick.
  9. Use the back of a spoon to spread the softened butter over the surface of the rolled out dough.
  10. Next sprinkle the cinnamon sugar over the buttered dough and gently push into the butter with your fingertips,
  11. Roll up the dough starting from the short side. Roll nice and tight.
  12. Slice off the rough edges at either side of the rolled up dough. Then roughly mark out nine pieces before slicing into nine rolls with a sharp knife.4 images showing steps 9-12 for making Cinnamon Swirls: 9. spread butter on rolled out dough, 10. sprinkle cinnamon sugar over butter, 11. Roll up, 12. slice into 9 even swirls.
  13. Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper. Then place the 9 rolls into the tin, swirls facing up. Cover and leave to rise again for 30 minutes.
  14. Whisk up the egg. Uncover the cinnamon swirls and brush with the egg. Place the cinnamon swirls in the preheated oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.2 images showing steps 13 & 14 for making Cinnamon rolls: 13. Place swirls in baking tin, 14. Bake until golden brown

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should baked cinnamon swirls be stored?

Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The rolls will keep well and stay soft for 3-4 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.

Can this recipe be made ahead of time?

Theres nothing better than fresh cinnamon swirls first thing in the morning. However, you'd have to get up super early to achieve this if making from scratch. Thankfully this recipe can be made the night before, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn.

Make the recipe as per the instructions up to when the sliced rolls are placed into the baking tin. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The rolls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Glaze with whisked egg before baking in the oven as per the recipe.

Can you freeze cinnamon swirls?

Once baked and fully cooled, place the swirls in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months.

When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each roll for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows of three. Golden brown and lying on top of brown paper.

🍰 Other easy baking recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Baked cinnamon swirls stuck together in two side by side rows with icing on the top and one roll broken off with a bite taken.
Print

Cinnamon Swirls

Sweet and delicious cinnamon swirls. Make your own cinnamon swirls at home with this easy recipe. It takes just 10 minutes to mix together the dough, no dough hook or bread machine needed! Soft and fluffy and filled with cinnamon sugar, they are perfect for breakfast, brunch or afternoon tea.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, brunch
Cuisine Danish, Scandinavian, Swiss
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
dough rising time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 25 minutes
Servings 9 Swirls
Calories 440kcal

Equipment

  • Small saucepan
  • Large mixing bowl
  • cling film
  • Small mixing bowl
  • rolling pin
  • Sharp knife
  • 9x9 inch square tine lined with greaseproof paper
  • Pastry brush for egg wash

Ingredients

For the bread:

  • 200 ml Semi skimmed 2% milk
  • 100 g unsalted butter cubed
  • 500 g strong white bread flour US: Bread flour
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 7 g sachet fast action yeast
  • Pinch salt

For the filling:

  • 75 g softened butter
  • 75 g dark brown sugar or muscovado sugar
  • 2 tablespoon ground cinnamon

Toppings:

  • 1 whisked egg to glaze
  • Icing sugar to ice or apricot jam for an apricot glaze

Instructions

  • Melt the butter and milk over a low heat in a small pan.
  • In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, caster sugar, yeast and salt.
  • Gradually pour the melted butter and milk into the dry ingredients. Stir well between each addition to eventually form a dough.
  • Turn the dough out onto a clean floured work surface. Knead for 2-3 minutes until it starts to feel smooth and less sticky.
  • Place the dough in an oiled bowl and cover.
  • Leave the bowl to stand in a warm place (e.g. - on top of a pre heated oven) for 1 hour or until doubled in size.
  • Meanwhile mix together the dark brown sugar and cinnamon. Put to one side.
  • After the dough has risen, uncover and turn out on a floured work surface. Flatten out the dough roughly with your fingertips. Then flour a rolling pin and roll into a rough rectangle 2-3mm thick.
  • Use the back of a spoon to spread the softened butter over the surface of the rolled out dough.
  • Next sprinkle the cinnamon sugar over the buttered dough and gently push into the butter with your fingertips.
  • Roll up the dough starting from the short side. Roll nice and tight.
  • Slice off the rough edges at either side of the rolled up dough. Then roughly mark out nine pieces before slicing into nine rolls with a sharp knife.
  • Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper. Then place the 9 rolls into the tin, swirls facing up. Cover and leave to rise again for 30 minutes.
  • Whisk up the egg. Uncover the cinnamon swirls and brush with the egg. Place the cinnamon swirls in the preheated oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Once cooled ice with icing sugar or brush over heated apricot jam.

Video

Notes

Fast action or instant yeast: One sachet of this will ensure a good rise. Make sure you use a yeast that states it can be added straight to the recipe or flour. I find fast action yeast super easy to work with as it doesn't need to be activated first and it always works well when making any kind of bread.
Fresh yeast could also be used here but double the amount would be needed. Fresh yeast will need to be activated in the milk first rather than adding to the flour mixture. If you choose this option you will need to melt the butter and milk in a pan then allow to cool to a luke warm temperature. Then dissolve the fresh yeast in the warm milk and allow to sit for a couple of minutes before mixing into the flour. Read more about different types of yeast and how to use them here.
Substitutes: For perfect fluffy rolls its best to not substitute the bread flour. Bread flour has a higher protein content so gives a better rise.
How should baked cinnamon swirls be stored? Once made, allow to fully cool then wrap in cling film and stored in an air tight container. The rolls will keep well and stay soft for 3-4 days, after this you may find that the rolls start to harden and go stale.
Can this recipe be made ahead of time? This recipe can be made the night before, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn for breakfast cinnamon swirls. Make the recipe as per the instructions, up to when the sliced rolls are placed into the baking tin. At this point cover with cling film and place in the fridge. The rolls can now stay in the fridge overnight as the low temperature will mean a slow rise. In the morning remove from the fridge and leave on the side for an hour to warm up. Glaze with whisked egg before baking in the oven as per the recipe.
Can you freeze cinnamon swirls? Once baked and fully cooled, place the swirls in an airtight container or sealable freezer bag and freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and either heat each roll for 1-2 minutes in the microwave or leave on the side to fully defrost then pop in the oven to warm for 5 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 440kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 82mg | Potassium: 120mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 535IU | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cinnamon Swirls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cinnamon-swirls/feed/ 0
Aubergine Parmigiana https://properfoodie.com/aubergine-parmigiana/ https://properfoodie.com/aubergine-parmigiana/#respond Fri, 11 Oct 2019 10:36:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11314 Aubergine parmigiana or melanzane parmigiana is one of the best recipes for getting the most out of your aubergines. The thinly sliced and pan fried aubergines are layered with a rich tomato sauce and freshly grated parmesan for a dish that is bursting with Italian flavour. Serve this simple aubergine parmigiana recipe as it is,...

Read More

The post Aubergine Parmigiana appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Aubergine parmigiana or melanzane parmigiana is one of the best recipes for getting the most out of your aubergines. The thinly sliced and pan fried aubergines are layered with a rich tomato sauce and freshly grated parmesan for a dish that is bursting with Italian flavour. Serve this simple aubergine parmigiana recipe as it is, or pad it out with an extra layer of cooked spaghetti added to the base of the baking dish.

aubergine parmigiana recipe

Easy Aubergine Parmigiana

For a rich and satisfying meal, full of flavour and packed full veg, the aubergine parmigiana is a clear winner. Its made by layering the aubergine with an Italian tomato sauce and then topping with sliced tomatoes, breadcrumbs and blobs of mozzarella. As soon as I pulled this incredible Italian bake out of my oven I knew that Aubergine parmigiana with crispy breadcrumbs and melted mozzarella was about to become a new favourite. Having said that, nearly all of my Italian recipes are my favourite - the Italians are just too clever 🙂

This aubergine recipe is also really easy to make, its all in the preparation. To ensure that your parmigiana is full of flavour and not full of water (from the aubergines) its best to fry off the aubergine slices and then allow them to cool and drain before layering up in the baking dish. I promise this is the only part that requires a bit of time and effort. After that its just a case of whipping up a quick tomato sauce, layering all the ingredients, adding a topping and then baking for 20 minutes.

Aubergine parmigiana also doubles up as a fantastic vegetarian lasagna. Just remember to use vegetarian parmesan cheese and for an added indulgence add in a couple of layers of bechamel white sauce. To keep this gluten free check the bechamel sauce for any flour and look for a gluten free alternative (or make your own). And either leave off the breadcrumbs or look for gluten free breadcrumbs.

Why is it called Aubergine Parmigiana?

Aubergine Parmigiana or eggplant parmigiana is the original parmigiana recipe that is said to have been created in southern Italy. However, the precise origins of the dish and how it got its name are widely debated. Many regions across Italy claim to have invented the dish and each produce their own classic and delicious variation of aubergine parmigiana (Melanzane alla parmigiana).

The word parmigiana translates to 'from Parma'. However, most believe that this is not the reasoning behind the name, as the dish is known to be from southern Italy and Parma is in Northern Italy.  Some believe that the dish may have originated from Sicily where 'Parmiciana' means slats of wood in the wooden shutters, which could be reminiscent of the overlapping aubergine in this recipe. Another more simple meaning to the name is the use of Parmesan cheese (Parmigiano-reggiano) in the dish.

aubergine bake

Ingredients for Aubergine Parmigiana Recipe

To keep this dish as simple as possible I've divided the ingredients up into 3 parts: the aubergine, the sauce, and the toppings. Prepare each part of the recipe in this order.

For pan frying the aubergine:

  • 3-4 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 large aubergines (600g) sliced length ways and half a cm thick
  • Few pinches of salt

For the aubergine parmigiana sauce:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Clove garlic finely chopped
  • 1 Large onion (150g) diced
  • 1 teaspoon Dried oregano
  • 690g jar of Passata

For the topping:

  • 6 medium tomatoes (300g) finely sliced
  • 30g Breadcrumbs (or gluten free breadcrumbs)
  • 50g grated parmesan (or vegetarian parmesan)
  • 100g buffalo mozzarella roughly torn
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves

Easy aubergine parmigiana

How to make Aubergine Parmigiana

Preparing the aubergine:

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat. Add a tablespoon of oil and allow to heat up. When the oil is hot carefully add the aubergine slices and fry on each side until golden brown. You will need to fry these off in batches as only 3 or 4 slices will fit in the pan at any one time. You can add more oil as required and season each batch with a bit of salt.frying aubergine slices
  2. After each batch of aubergine has finished cooking carefully remove from the pan and leave to drain on a plate lined with kitchen towel.

Preparing the aubergine parmigiana sauce:

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat (use same pan from previous step to save on washing up) then add half a tablespoon of oil and the finely chopped garlic. Fry for 10 seconds then add the diced onion and fry until soft. Next add a teaspoon of dried oregano and mix in well.cooking garlic onions and oregano
  2. Pour in a large 690g jar of passata and stir into the cooked onions.adding large jar of passata
  3. Season with black pepper and allow to simmer for 5 minutes.sauce simmering and black pepper being added

Putting together the aubergine parmigiana:

  1. Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan).
  2. For this next step you will need a medium sized square or rectangular baking dish. I used a 20x24cm rectangular dish.
  3. Begin by placing a layer of cooked aubergine in the based of the dish.adding first layer of aubergines to base of the baking dish
  4. Next add a layer of the tomato sauce and sprinkle over 1-2 tablespoons of grated parmesan, continue to layer like this until all the aubergine, sauce and parmesan has been used.continuing to layer aubergine with tomato sauce and parmesan
  5. Finish with a final layer of sliced tomatoes.adding a final layer of sliced tomatoes
  6. Then top with breadcrumbs, parmesan and torn pieces of mozzarella.topping with breadcrumbs parmesan and mozzarella
  7. Place the baking dish in the centre of the oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the mozzarella has turned golden brown and the sauce is bubbling.
  8. Remove from the oven, top with fresh basil leaves and serve.serving with fresh basil leaves

What to serve with Aubergine Parmigiana?

The the best thing to serve with aubergine parmigiana is a big bowl of spaghetti in a tomato sauce. If you have the time, make the spaghetti in tomato sauce first and then use a slightly deeper baking dish in order to add the spaghetti to the dish before layering on the aubergine and other ingredients. The whole lot can then be baked and served together. Delicious!!

This lovely bake can also be served with a simple salad or for a bit of protein add a layer of sliced chicken to the bake. For a proper chicken parmigiana, coat the chicken in flour, egg and breadcrumbs first.

Eggplant parmigiana

Can you freeze Aubergine Parmigiana?

For best results freeze the aubergine parmigiana without baking it. Once the parmigiana is layered up in an oven proof dish, allow to fully cool then seal with a lid or cling film and place in the freezer. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and defrost fully then bake at 180 degrees (fan) for 30 minutes or until piping hot throughout.

Can I prepare aubergine Parmigiana in advance?

If preparing in advanced once you have made up the parmigiana in the baking dish it can be placed in the fridge until you are ready to bake it. As the dish will now be chilled, add an extra 10 minutes to the baking time.

Baked aubergine parmigiana

What else can you do with Aubergines?

One of the most simple and satisfying recipes for aubergine is this Simon Hopkinson grilled aubergine and feta cheese recipe. I love to serve this as starter at a dinner party. To make this delicious starter you will need one aubergine per person. Start by scoring the skin with a knife in four places along the length of the aubergine then rub oil all over the skin. Then place on a baking tray and bake at 180 degrees for 20-30 minutes or until the skin is charred. Cool and then peel off the skin (the scoring should help with this). With the stem still in place slice the peeled aubergine in half with the top end held together by the stem. Lay the aubergine flat on a small plate with the two halves next to each other.  In a small dish mix together olive oil, chopped parsley and chopped garlic then drizzle over the aubergine. Finally crumble over some feta cheese and serve.

I also love to use aubergine to make my meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry - These are proper Italian pies!

 1 hour to produce recipeunder 400 calories recipe5 of 5 day in this recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

vegetarian lasagna
Print

Aubergine Parmigiana

Aubergine parmigiana or melanzane parmigiana is one of the best recipes for getting the most out of your aubergines. The thinly sliced and pan fried aubergines are layered with a rich tomato sauce and freshly grated parmesan for a dish that is bursting with Italian flavour. Serve this simple aubergine parmigiana recipe as it is, or pad it out with an extra layer of cooked spaghetti added to the base of the baking dish. 
Course Main Course, Side Dish
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 40 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 318.6kcal

Equipment

  • Large frying pan
  • medium baking dish (24x20cm)

Ingredients

For the aubergine:

  • 3-4 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 large aubergines (600g sliced length ways and half a cm thick)
  • Few pinches of salt

For the sauce:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Clove garlic finely chopped
  • 1 Large onion diced (150g)
  • 1 teaspoon Dried oregano
  • 690 g jar of Passata
  • Black pepper

For the topping:

  • 6 medium tomatoes sliced (300g)
  • 30 g Breadcrumbs (or gluten free breadcrumbs)
  • 50 g grated parmesan (or vegetarian parmesan)
  • 100 g buffalo mozzarella roughly torn
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves

Instructions

Preparing the aubergine:

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat. Add a tablespoon of oil and allow to heat up. When the oil is hot carefully add the aubergine slices and fry on each side until golden brown. You will need to fry these off in batches as only 3 or 4 slices will fit in the pan at any one time. You can add more oil as required and season each batch with a bit of salt.
    frying aubergine slices
  • After each batch of aubergine has finished cooking carefully remove from the pan and leave to drain on a plate lined with kitchen towel.

Preparing the aubergine parmigiana sauce:

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat (use same pan from previous step to save on washing up) then add half a tablespoon of oil and the finely chopped garlic. Fry for 10 seconds then add the diced onion and fry until soft. Next add a teaspoon of dried oregano and mix well.
    cooking garlic onions and oregano
  • Next pour in a large 690g jar of passata and stir into the cooked onions
    adding large jar of passata
  • Season with black pepper and allow to simmer for 5 minutes.
    sauce simmering and black pepper being added

Putting together the aubergine parmigiana:

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan).
  • For this next step you will need a medium sized square or rectangular baking dish. I used a 20x24cm rectangular dish.
  • Begin by placing a layer of cooked aubergine in the based of the dish.
    adding first layer of aubergines to base of the baking dish
  • Then add a layer of the tomato sauce and sprinkle over 1-2 tablespoons of grated parmesan, continue to layer like this until all the aubergine, sauce and parmesan has been used.
    continuing to layer aubergine with tomato sauce and parmesan
  • Finish with a final layer of sliced tomatoes.
    adding a final layer of sliced tomatoes
  • Then top with breadcrumbs, parmesan and torn pieces of mozzarella.
    topping with breadcrumbs parmesan and mozzarella
  • Place the baking dish in the centre of the oven and bake for 20 minutes or until the mozzarella has turned golden brown and the sauce is bubbling.
  • Remove from the oven, top with fresh basil leaves and serve.
    serving with fresh basil leaves

Video

Notes

Nutritional information for aubergine parmigiana

Can you freeze Aubergine Parmigiana?

For best results freeze the aubergine parmigiana without baking it. Once the parmigiana is layered up in an oven proof dish, allow to fully cool then seal with a lid or cling film and place in the freezer. When ready to eat remove from the freezer and defrost fully then bake at 180 degrees (fan) for 30 minutes or until piping hot throughout.

Can I prepare aubergine Parmigiana in advance?

If preparing in advanced once you have made up the parmigiana in the baking dish it can be placed in the fridge until you are ready to bake it. As the dish will now be chilled, add an extra 10 minutes to the baking time.

What else can you do with Aubergines?

One of the most simple and satisfying recipes for aubergine is baked aubergine and feta cheese. I love to serve this as starter at a dinner party. To make this delicious starter you will need one aubergine per person. Start by scoring the skin with a knife in four places along the length of the aubergine then rub oil all over the skin. Then place on a baking tray and bake at 180 degrees for 20-30 minutes or until the skin is charred. Cool and then peel off the skin (the scoring should help with this). With the stem still in place slice the peeled aubergine in half with the top end held together by the stem still. In a small dish mix together olive oil, chopped parsley and chopped garlic then drizzle over the aubergine. Finally crumble over some feta cheese and serve.
I also love to use aubergine to make my meat and leek pies with aubergine pastry - These are proper Italian pies! 

Nutrition

Serving: 500g | Calories: 318.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 20.9g | Protein: 14.3g | Fat: 20.4g | Saturated Fat: 7.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9.9g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 3.9g | Sugar: 14.7g

PIN FOR LATER

Italian aubergine parmigiana with crispy breadcrumbs and melted mozzarella

The post Aubergine Parmigiana appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/aubergine-parmigiana/feed/ 0
Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/ https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/#comments Thu, 29 Oct 2020 01:37:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5236 No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to...

Read More

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a second bowl of soup in the background

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Roasting a huge pumpkin and then turning it into soup is so, so satisfying, especially at this time of year when pumpkins are absolutely everywhere. With the nights drawing in and the weather turning colder its so nice to embrace the change and sit down to a warming bowl of homemade roast pumpkin soup.

Pumpkin and chestnuts are such a wonderful combination and it works so well here. Once the two ingredients have been roasted and then blended together they create a sweet and creamy flavour. A delightful earthiness comes from the pumpkin with a smokey taste in the background from the roast chestnuts.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this roast pumpkin soup for 4 people you will need:

The ingredients required to make spiced pumpkin soup, labelled with white text.

Ingredient notes

Pumpkin: The good old pumpkin is actually a type of winter squash and so any variety of winter squash will work well here. So if you're fresh out of pumpkins, substitute with butternut squash. Use either 2 small squash or 1 medium squash.

Alternatively, if you want to make this soup in double quick time, you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree.

Chestnuts: This recipe uses raw shelled chestnuts, which need to be roasted and the shells removed. See how to roast chestnuts for instructions. However, if you prefer you can buy and use pre cooked chestnuts with the shells removed (this will be quicker and easier, but I do enjoying roasting chestnuts myself at this time of year!)

If you can't get hold of any chestnuts, replace with nuts of a similar flavour such as hazelnuts or pecans.

Cream: The cream in this recipe is completely optional. I love to add it in right at the end to lighten up the soup and to make it super creamy. However, the chestnuts alone provide a creaminess to this soup. So if you want to keep things a little healthier, just remove the cream.

🔪 Step by step instructions

If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts.

  1. Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with a little oil
  2. Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  3. Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  4. Remove the roast pumpkin from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.A collage of four step by step images of how to make the first part of the pumpkin soup recipe. 1. prepare pumpkin, 2. roast pumpkin, 3. fry onions, 4. add roast pumpkin and chopped chestnuts to onions.
  5. Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  6. Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  7. Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth.
  8. Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.Second 4 step by step instruction images for making pumpkin soup: 5. add spices, 6. add stock, 7. blend, 8. add cream.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can this soup be frozen?

If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.

Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.

Why should I roast the pumpkin?

Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.

Can spices be added to this soup?

This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Pumpkin soup being ladled into a bowl

🍂 Other Autumn recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a sprinkle of pumpkin seeds and parsley.
Print

Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roasted pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Soup, starter
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 552kcal

Equipment

  • Baking trays for roasting pumpkin and chestnuts
  • Extra large pan for making soup
  • Hand blender or blending machine

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon oil
  • 2 small or 1 medium pumpkin or 2 tins of pumpkin puree
  • 2 onions peeled and diced
  • 400 g raw shells on chestnuts or 200g cooked de-shelled chestnuts
  • 1 teaspoon oregano
  • 1 teaspoon sage
  • 2 vegetable stock cubes
  • Salt and pepper
  • 800 ml boiling water
  • 250 ml single cream
  • Pumpkin seeds and chopped parsley to serve

Instructions

  • If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts. Roughly chop up roasted chestnuts before adding to the recipe.
  • Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with 1 tablespoon oil
  • Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  • Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in 1 tablespoon oil a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  • When the pumpkin is cooked, remove from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the pumpkin flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.
  • Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  • Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  • Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth. (Note: if soup needs reheating after blending, return to the pan and heat to a gentle simmer. Do not boil.)
  • Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.

Notes

Substitutions:
  • Pumpkins can be replaced with any kind of winter squash or if you’re in a rush and don’t have time to roast the squash you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree instead.
  • If you can’t get hold of raw chestnuts or don’t have the to roast them you an replace with re-cooked and shelled chestnuts. Or completely replace chestnuts with hazelnuts or pecans.
  • For a healthier version leave out the cream
 
Can this soup be frozen?
If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.
Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.
Why should I roast the pumpkin?
Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.
Can spices be added to this soup?
This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Nutrition

Serving: 500g | Calories: 552kcal | Carbohydrates: 73g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 2204mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 43218IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 192mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with an improved recipe, new images, new step-by-step photos and new recipe tips & FAQs.

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/feed/ 8
Roast Beef Dinner with Leeks in Cheese Sauce https://properfoodie.com/beef-roast-dinner-leeks-cheese-sauce/ https://properfoodie.com/beef-roast-dinner-leeks-cheese-sauce/#respond Fri, 15 Apr 2016 11:50:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1833 How to prepare the perfect Sunday roast - with a full beef joint cooked to your liking, served with veggies and leeks in cheese sauce Sunday roast dinner I'm pretty sure that there's nothing better in the world than sitting down to a Sunday beef roast, well almost nothing, I guess it depends on what...

Read More

The post Roast Beef Dinner with Leeks in Cheese Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
How to prepare the perfect Sunday roast - with a full beef joint cooked to your liking, served with veggies and leeks in cheese sauce

Topside beef roast dinner

Sunday roast dinner

I'm pretty sure that there's nothing better in the world than sitting down to a Sunday beef roast, well almost nothing, I guess it depends on what dessert is; and if Saturday was a big night out or not; and if lots of wine was consumed; and if by about 4pm on Sunday the biggest meal ever is needed. But anyway - its definitely up there with a cheese & wine on a Friday night, or sipping juice from a coconut on a deserted hot beach on a Monday morning. - its just good and homely, and a proper pick-me-up.

Even if its not Sunday this meal is still the meal of comfort, home and relaxing. Am I convincing you yet? Do you feel the need to rush out and buy meat, potatoes and 3 veggies asap? No? Even if I throw in leeks in a super creamy cheese sauce with a crispy top?

Look .....

Topside of beef with leeks in a creamy cheese sauce

I just can't say no to this!

Soooo as the Sunday roast dinner is  the weekend staple in most households in the Great British Isles, its definitely necessary that I put a beef roast dinner recipe up on the blog. And here's the thing - it really is so easy to  make. No complicated ingredients or recipes and nothing that will mean you have to slave away for hours in the kitchen. A 500g topside of beef can be cooked and served in 40 minutes, so no need to get up at the crack of dawn to switch on the oven.

However, if beef isn't your thing why not try roast chicken instead?

Sunday is a day of rest after a busy week

Last weekend was very busy for me and so a Sunday roast was definitely on the agenda - as mentioned in my last post I had decide to host a little gourmet/birthday drinks night. But in terms of food: a little, turned into a lot and oh my gosh I was pretty stressed. There was lots of running around and multiple trips to the supermarket and I basically spent every night, last week in my kitchen, preparing and cooking everything from soup and chilli con carne to filo-pastry cups and panna cottas. My freezer was rammed, my fridge was bursting and my crisps/treats drawer was overflowing (yes I have a crisps/treats drawer). To say I went over the top is an understatement. But you know - it was a big birthday and I'd just finished a cooking course and its not likely I'll have to do it again any time soon - so I really went for it. It was hard work and cooking for 20 people is definitely like (or probably like) climbing a mountain. But it seemed to go down well and I think everyone enjoyed it.

So, yes, after all the weekend fun was done and tidied away, it was time for beef, perfectly cooked and served with a dollop of leeks in cheese sauce.

Topside of beef roast dinner

Every Sunday should look like this. I hope the recipe below is helpful - let me know, I'd love to hear from you:-) For a greater starter before digging into this perfectly cooked beef why not serve up a delicious leek and potato soup?

Cheese sauce should be in every meal

If your cooking up a storm for a Christmas Day roast then also check out my sprouts in blue cheese sauce here! or for another great way to use cheese sauce is a meal have a look at my cauliflower cheese and fish pie with cheese sauce. Making some party snack? why not have a go at a cheese sauce dip?

📖 Recipe

Topside beef roast dinner leeks in cheese sauce
Print

Beef Roast dinner with leeks in cheese sauce

How to prepare the perfect Sunday roast - with a full beef joint cooked to your liking, served with veggies and leeks in cheese sauce
Course Dinner, roast dinner, sunday dinner, sunday lunch, sunday roast
Cuisine British
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 2 people

Ingredients

  • 500 g Topside of beef
  • 200 g Baby carrots
  • 1 onion quartered
  • 200 g green beans

For the leeks in cheese sauce:

  • 2 medium leeks
  • 30 g plain flour
  • 30 g butter
  • 500 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 100 g mature cheddar cheese grated
  • salt and pepper to season

For the gravy:

  • Juices from the cooked beef
  • ½ pint beef stock
  • 2 teaspoon of gravy powder

Instructions

Sealing the beef:

  • Remove the beef from the fridge 30 minutes before cooking in order to bring it up to room temperature.
  • Put a large frying or griddle pan on high heat. Whilst the pan is heating up place the beef on a large plate or board and drizzle with olive oil. Use your fingers to ensure the meat is fully coated with the oil and then season with salt and pepper. One the pan is smoking hot place in the beef and seal on all sides using tongues to turn every minute or so. Sealing the meat should take 3-4 minutes.

Cooking the beef:

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degree C (Fan).
  • Chop the onion into large chunks and wash the baby carrots. Place the onion and carrots in the base of a roasting tin and balance the beef on top. Cover with foil and place in the oven.
  • For two people I used a 500g topside of beef, cooking time for this varies depending on how well done you like your beef.
  • •For pink (medium-rare) a piece of meat this size will need around 20 minutes in the oven at 180 degrees C.
  • •For medium: 25 minutes, 180 degrees C
  • •for well done: 30 minutes, 180 degrees C
  • Remember this is for a 500g piece of beef and time in the oven will increase with weight. (1.5kg topside cooked to medium will need 1hr 15 minutes.

Resting the beef:

  • How ever you like your beef, the most important stage is resting. Resting the beef after its been in the oven will keep it tender and moist. Its a good idea to try and rest the meat for at least half an hour. For this particular piece of meat, once out of the oven; I removed it from the roasting tin, wrapped in foil and left to rest for 20 minutes.

Veggies:

  • Discard the onion from the roasting tin, pour the juices into a small saucepan ready for the gravy and transfer the baby carrots to a small container and set to one side. For the green beans; first prepare a bowl of cold water and leave at the side of the hob.Bring a pan of water to the boil then simmer and add the beans. Simmer the beans for 3-4 minutes or until just cooked but still a little crunchy (try one!). Once cooked remove the beans from the water and plunge immediately into the bowl of cold water in order to stop the cooking process. Set to one side along with the carrots.

Leeks in cheese sauce:

  • Slice the leeks into 2cm round pieces and line up to cover the base of a baking dish. For the cheese sauce; melt the butter in a small sauce pan over a medium heat, then add the flour and mix together well the form a roux (a smooth white paste which will be used as a thickening agent for the sauce). Take the pan off the heat and gradually add the milk. Stir well in between each addition of milk. return the pan to the heat and gently bring to the boil. Ensure you stir continuously whilst the sauce is heating in order to prevent lumps. Once the sauce begins to boil this will allow the flour to release its starch and you will notice the sauce becomes thick and smooth. At this point add the grated cheese and cook at a simmer for an additional 5 mins in order to melt the cheese and cook out the flour (removes the starchy taste). Remember to keep stirring. Pour the sauce over the leeks and place in the oven to cook for 20 minutes at 180 degrees C. Foil can be placed over the leeks to prevent the top from burning. Once fully cooked (knife will easily push through the leeks) the foil can be removed and the leeks can be finished off under the grill for a crispy top.  

Gravy:

  • heat up the stock and add this to the beef juices continue to heat on a low setting. Put the 2 tsps of gravy powder into a small ramekin or cup, add a small amount of water and stir to form a paste. Pour the paste into the stock and stir well. Continue to stir and heat until the gravy boils and thickens, then turn down the heat and leave to simmer until ready to serve. 

Serving up:

  • Slice up the beef and present on plates or a help yourself style board. In a small frying pan heat up 2 tablespoon oil and 2 tablespoon water- add the pre prepared carrots and beans to the pan and toss in the warm water and oil mixture for 1-2 minutes. this will allow the veggies to be warmed up and will give hem a nice shiny finish. serve veggies along side the meat. Crisp up the leeks under the grill adding more grated cheese or parmesan to the top if desired and serve.
  • Serve the gravy in a gravy boat or drizzle over the beef and veggies.

The post Roast Beef Dinner with Leeks in Cheese Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/beef-roast-dinner-leeks-cheese-sauce/feed/ 0
Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/ https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/#comments Thu, 16 Jun 2016 12:41:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1920 Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from...

Read More

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup

This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from the tomatoes and the peppery anise from the basil. It really is a heavenly bowl of slurpful, deliciousness.

Rosted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup
Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup

I decided it was time to get back into soup-making a few weekends ago, as summer is now here and I can no longer get away with hiding under huge jumpers and saying that I need that extra layer of fat to keep me warm. Yes its definitely time to trim up. I always find the best way to do this is with soups and salads. But only with the best and most tastiest soups and salads, otherwise i'd be straight back on the chocolate and chips in no time. So I intend to make my next few posts all about the summer trim down. (With the exception of the wedding cake post - Coming soon!!).

So if, like me, you are feeling the need to transform from a fat waddling caterpillar into a bright, floating butterfly then this soup is a good place to start. Its a really easy recipe and can be made in bulk for the fridge or freezer for those "no time!!" days.

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)
Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)

Its also great to take to work or have as a snack if your feeling super peckish in between meals. And its more than likely a dish that will please everyone; from friends round for dinner to your children's mates starving after a long day at school.... lets face it most kids love tomato soup and this is the creme de la creme of tomato soups. Tomato soup was definitely my favourite as a child and I think the only thing thats changed is the topping, instead of grated cheese its now creme fraiche - so grown up 🙂

Right well I'm off to finish my sisters wedding cake - busy busy, hoping I can show the finished result soon!!

Happy soup making!!

📖 Recipe

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar
Print

Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup

Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

  • 6 tablespoon olive oil
  • 3 large onions roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 15 medium vine ripened tomatoes quartered and seeds removed
  • 3 large red peppers capsicum, de-seeded and roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried marjoram
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Natural yogurt/Creme Fraiche to serve optional

Instructions

  • Pre-heat oven to 200 degrees C. Fill kettle and boil.
  • Place the chopped tomatoes and peppers onto two separate trays, drizzle each tray with 2 tablespoon olive oil and season well. Place in the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until edges start to blacken.
  • Whilst the tomatoes and peppers are in the oven; heat up 2 tablespoon oil in a large pan, add the onions and fry slowly until soft. Add the garlic, dried herbs and stir. Once cooked, add the tomatoes and peppers to the onions along with all the cooking juices. Mix together well and add around 250ml of hot water from the kettle. Bring to the boil and then remove from the heat.
  • Transfer the vegetables and all juices to a blender or use an electric hand blender to create a smooth soup. Add more water if the soup appears to thick (should coat the back of a spoon. Tear up the basil leave, add to the soup and briefly blend again.  
  • Finally, pass the soup through a sieve to achieve a lovely smooth finish - use the back of a spoon to ensure all the soup is pushed through the sieve. - Get as much through as possible so to not take away any flavour. Reheat slightly if necessary (but don't boil). Season if required and serve.
  • Soup can be stored in the fridge for 5-7 days or if you want to keep it for longer; transfer to a container and freeze. 

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/feed/ 1
Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/#comments Thu, 28 Jul 2016 20:45:21 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2029 Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed...

Read More

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.

Butternut Squash soup

Roasted Butternut squash soup

Reasons to put this recipe to the top of your 'mid-week tea' list or even your 'recipes to make for the freezer' list, right now:

  • It’s chocker with lots of healthy vegetables.
  • It fills you up in next to no time.
  • And it looks amazing with all those vibrant greens shining through from the celery and sage. What’s not to love about this soup?

Butternut squash can also be used to pad out a creamy pumpkin pasta dish and is also great in a quinoa salad side dish, which I usually serve with my satay chicken recipe.

Do you peel butternut squash before cooking?

Theres no need to peel butternut squash before cooking. Not only is this incredibly difficult but it also takes a good while to peel when raw. Its definitely so much easier to peel the skin off a roasted butternut squash. My favourite thing about preparing this squash soup is the roasting of the butternut.

How do you roast butternut squash?

  1. Chop the butternut squash in half length ways
  2. Scoop out the seeds with a spoon.
  3. Seeds can be discarded or washed, dried and then turned into a lovely snack by roasting in the oven until crisp.
  4. Drizzle oil over the exposed flesh of the butternut squash. Place on a baking tray and pop in the oven for around an hour.
  5. The squash is cooked when the tip of a knife easily pushes into the flesh.
  6. Remove from the oven a cool before peeling off the skin.

Roasted Butternut squash

So delicious! Baking the squash without peeling it means that the skin comes away from the flesh with no hassle, so this really is an easy dish.

Can you eat the skin of butternut squash?

The skin of butternut squash can be quite tough and so generally its best to remove. However, the skin can be edible if you roast the squash until the skin starts to soften.

How do you make roasted butternut squash soup?

  1. First roast the squash as instructed above
  2. Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised.
  3. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  4. Chop the roasted squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  5. Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.

Recipe Tip: Transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.

How long will this recipe keep?

Once made store this soup in a sealed container and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days

Can I freeze homemade squash soup?

Yes homemade butternut squash can be frozen. Make sure the soup is cooled before transferring to a sealable container, then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. Make sure reheated soup is piping hot all the way through.

serve the soup with feta and pistachios

How do you add cream to soup without it curdling?

To prevent curdling always take soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding cream. Adding cream or yogurt to a soup can really add to the flavour as well as help to thicken soup with a thinner consistency.

What should I serve with this recipe?

Every good soup deserves warm homemade mini bread rolls, perfect for dunking and moping up. If you're having this soup as a starter to a 3 course dinner then why not follow with a roast beef dinner or comforting fish pie. For more 3 course meal ideas have a look at my collection of romantic dinner recipes. Love soup? Have a look at all my soup recipes here.

 1 hour 15 minutes to make recipegluten free recipeunder 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipeVegetarian Recipe

📖 Recipe

butternut squash soup
Print

Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage

Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.
Course aperitivo, Appetizer, lunch, starter
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 401.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large butternut squash (1600g - raw whole weight)
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 large onions chopped (200g)
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 2 sticks of celery chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Black pepper
  • 750 ml vegetable stock
  • Fresh sage leaves (5 leaves, stalks removed and roughly chopped)
  • Water to add if required
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Pistachios and feta to top (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 180°C. Halve the butternut squash - you'll need a large knife for this and a little bit of patience. Scoop out the seeds, and either discard or roast in the oven and serve as a snack. Keep the skin on - we will remove this after cooking!
  • Place the halved squash on a baking tray and drizzle with olive oil. Use your fingers to spread the oil evenly over the flesh. Place the squash in the oven and bake for around 1 hour. Check regularly, the squash will be cooked when it starts to caramelise and the tip of a knife can be pressed easily in to the flesh. Once cooked remove from the oven and set to one side to cool.
    Roasted Butternut squash
  • Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  • Whilst the soup is simmering, remove the skin from the cooling squash. This can be done by either peeling the skin away or by scooping out the flesh with a spoon. Once the skin is completely removed chop the squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  • Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.
  • Recipe Tip: transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.
  • Finally pass the blended soup through a sieve, taste and add salt and pepper if required. If serving immediately reheat gently in a pan but do not boil. Serve in bowls and top with chopped pistachios and crumbled feta cheese if desired.
  • If storing for another day do not reheat. Transfer to sealable containers and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 706g | Calories: 401.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 40.7g | Protein: 17.2g | Fat: 20.3g | Saturated Fat: 5.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8.8g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 3.8g | Sugar: 23g

PIN FOR LATERButternut squash soup with celery and sage and topped with feta and chopped pistachios

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/feed/ 2
Sticky Apple Treacle Tart and our Pizza oven https://properfoodie.com/sticky-apple-treacle-tart/ https://properfoodie.com/sticky-apple-treacle-tart/#comments Sun, 09 Oct 2016 19:07:23 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2613 Sticky apple treacle tart! This lovely autumnal tart is so good that I have no doubt I will making it every autumn. It’s the perfect mix of sticky treacle and caramelised apples, which sets the tone nicely for October and Halloween.  Why I have not thought to combine an apple pie with a treacle tart...

Read More

The post Sticky Apple Treacle Tart and our Pizza oven appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
a-jump-to-print-button

Sticky apple treacle tart! This lovely autumnal tart is so good that I have no doubt I will making it every autumn.

It’s the perfect mix of sticky treacle and caramelised apples, which sets the tone nicely for October and Halloween.  Why I have not thought to combine an apple pie with a treacle tart before now is a complete mystery to me. Its also a great shame that I’ve been missing out on this master piece of a dessert for all this time. It really is wonderful and I definitely need to make several more of these tarts and get a couple in the freezer.

Desserts are always a good thing to focus on in October as there’s still plenty of September fruit kicking about for apple crumble, plum and rhubarb crumble, spiced pumpkin muffins, rhubarb galette, Yorkshire parkin, plum and rhubarb crumble, fig and apple chutney ....the list goes on. And a nice warm dessert with ice cream or custard is just what is needed once the temperature starts to fall. When it comes to warming comfort food, this dessert does not disappoint. Check out my homemade, no churn ice creams if you want to make this tart extra special.

sticky apple treacle tart slice with vanilla ice cream

A little effort is required if the whole thing is going to be made from scratch.

However, this sticky apple treacle deliciousness becomes really quick and simple if you don’t mind using shop bought sweet pastry. If you do want to take on the challenge of making your own pastry, then there are a few simple rules that can help make it perfect:

  • Try and keep all the ingredients as cold as possible. chill everything first and when combining only use your finger tips and not your palms, which will introduce more heat.
  • Chill the pastry once its made and chill once again after its been rolled and lined in the tin.
  • Blind bake before adding the filling and always fill the baking beans or flour up to the top so the pastry at the sides of the tin is held firmly in place
  • Save any off cuts of pastry as they can be used later on to patch up any holes (no-one will know!!)

Once you have a pastry case ready to go, just pile in some stewed apples, followed by a treacle and breadcrumb filling and pop the whole thing into the oven. It usually takes around an hour to bake through, but it’s definitely worth the wait.

sticky apple treacle tart taking slice

Just before the recipe.....another pizza oven update.

Very exciting news; actual pizzas have been made!! I know that summer is over but we don't care - the summer has been spent with us lovingly building our fabulous cob oven and we can now enjoy our pizzas whilst huddled around the oven for warmth.

ben-at-the-pizza-oven

The oven itself still has a few bits to finish off; like a final outer layer to make it look pretty and a roof over the whole thing to provide a bit of protection from the winter weather. But as it stands, it can function and so we aren't going to let a last final layer and the lack of a roof stop us from making some proper pizzas!! and my goodness they are proper. I will be sharing everything about our cob oven build and pizza making recipes on here very soon!! There are so many uses for this oven and I can't wait to get cooking up some amazing wood fired meals. But for now we'll just be having fun practising our pizzas. First attempt wasn't too shabby:

margarita-just-gone-in

margarita-coming-out-of-pizza-oven

marinara-coming-out-of-pizza-oven

marinara-being-sliced

Best Sunday pizza afternoon ever!!

📖 Recipe

Print

Sticky Apple Treacle Tart

A delightful autumnal dessert with stewed apples, a treacle filling, warming syrupy flavours and a crumbly, sweet pastry base.
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 570kcal

Ingredients

For the pastry

  • 2 egg yolks
  • 2 tablespoon ice cold water
  • 100 g unsalted butter cubed
  • 100 g icing sugar
  • 220 g plain flour

For the stewed apple filling

  • 400 g baking apples peeled and chopped
  • 50 g caster sugar
  • 20 g unsalted butter
  • 2 tablespoon water

For the treacle filling

  • 425 g golden syrup
  • 425 double cream
  • 2 eggs
  • 110 g breadcrumbs
  • 75 g ground almonds

For the topping

  • 1 baking apple

Equipment

  • 10 inch tart/flan tin with loose base

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C

For the pastry

  • whisk together the 2 egg yolks and 2 tablespoon of water then place to one side. In a bowl soften the butter using your fingers and then sieve in the icing sugar. Still using your fingers mix the icing sugar and butter to form a paste. Next sieve in the flour and rub all the ingredients together with the tips of your fingers to create a breadcrumb consistency.
  • Gradually add the egg yolks to the flour mix using a "claw" shaped hand to combine. The pastry should start to come together and eventually form into a ball of pastry. Wrap the pastry in cling film and place in the fridge for 20-30 minutes.

For the stewed apples

  • Whilst the pastry is chilling make up the stewed apple filling.
  • In a large pan melt the butter then add the apple, sugar and water.Mix well and simmer on a medium heat for 5 minutes. After minutes check if the apples have begun to soften. Continue to simmer until they are soft enough to mash, add more sugar and water if it starts to look to dry. Once mashed continue to cook to ensure any larger lumps have softened. The finished product shouldn't bit too wet as this will cause the base of the tart to go soggy. Simmer for a little longer if necessary. Spoon the stewed apples into a dish and set to one side to cool.

Preparing the pastry case.

  • Before rolling out the chilled pastry, prepared the tart tin by rubbing a thin layer of butter over the inner surfaces and then dust with icing sugar.
  • Lightly flour your work surface and rolling pin then carefully roll out the pastry to around 3mm thick. As you are rolling move the pastry around by 90 degrees every few rolls and occasionally flip. This should ensure the pastry doesn't stick to the work surface and will create a more circular shape.
  • Once the pastry is rolled out, use the rolling pin to drape the pastry over the tin. Carefully push the pastry into the corners of the tin and into the sides of the fluted edges. Once you're happy trim using a knife and re wrap the excess in cling and save in the fridge for any patching up that might be needed later on.
  • In order to ensure the pastry is cooked through the pastry case must be blind baked before the filling is added. This can be done with baking paper and baking beans or by placing cling film over the pastry and then filling with flour up to the rim and wrapping the over hanging cling film over the top of the flour. Place the pastry in the oven and bake for 10-15 minutes. Watch that the pastry doesn't start to go too dark. Check under the flour or beans to see if the pastry has dried out, then remove from the oven, keep in the tart tin and set to one side. If any holes have appeared or if bits of pastry have broken off. Simply patch up with the saved pastry cut offs from earlier and pop back in the over for another couple of minutes.

For the treacle filling

  • In a small pan gently heat the heat the syrup to loosen up, then leave to one side for 5 minutes to cool slightly. While the syrup is cooling mix the cream and 2 eggs together in a bowl. Pour the syrup into the cream mixture and stir well. (NOTE: if the syrup is still too hot it will start to cook the eggs). In a separate bowl mix the breadcrumbs and ground almonds and then make a well. Pour the syrup mixture into the well and mix until smooth.

Putting together the tart

  • Spoon the cooled stewed apples into the middle of the pastry case and then spread evenly over the base. Next pour the treacle filling over the apples and fill to just below the rim of the pastry case. For the topping slice up another baking apple into segments and arrange carefully in the top of the treacle filling.
  • Place the tart in the middle of the oven and bake for 1 hour, checking at 40 and 50 minutes. The tart will be done when it appears to be just set, it may still have a slight wobble to t in the centre. Remove from the oven and allow to cool for 15 minutes before removing from the tin.
  • Serve with ice-cream, custard, or cream

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 570kcal | Fat: 33.3g

nutrition-info-sticky-apple-treacle-tart

**Estimated nutritional information per serving and per 100g of sticky apple treacle tart. Refer to my Nutrition Information Guide to find out more about how this is calculated and the sources used.

A delightful autumnal dessert with stewed apples, a treacle filling, warming syrupy flavours and a crumbly, sweet pastry base.

The post Sticky Apple Treacle Tart and our Pizza oven appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sticky-apple-treacle-tart/feed/ 2
Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/#comments Thu, 13 Oct 2016 12:48:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2643 With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had...

Read More

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had in our veg patch this year.

celery and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Why make this recipe?

Its rustic, its hearty and its a really properly homemade soup. The fresh taste from the celery leaves is nicely balanced here with the sweet apples and the bitter blue cheese. It really is a soup that has it all and is just what I want to come home to on a dark, rainy night.

Celery

Not something at the top of most people shopping lists and I know a lot of people would rather avoid celery. However, the humble celery stick is highly regarded in our household....more so since the creation of this great soup (and maybe a little more so by me than Ben, I could eat celery all day long).

Why is celery good for you?

  • Its super low in calories and fat (guilt free eating all the way)
  • It contains a good amount of fibre so is great for digestion.
  • Its shape, texture and strength make it perfect for chopping into crudites for dips. (check out my beetroot and red pepper dip for something sweet and zinging to dip your celery into).
  • Its ridiculously easy to grow. It really does take care of itself; as long as it has good soil and the room to grow to its full potential (a good 30cm between plants). The yield is also pretty good, especially in terms of leaves.
  • It can be used in all types of recipes and really gives a great boost to the flavour: salads, stews, soups, pesto. (watch out for my celery pesto post coming soon)
  • Its leaves, which are often over looked, usually have the most flavour and have a lovely deep green colour. As each plant supplies a large quantity of leaves; its more than likely that celery growers will find themselves over run. As the leaves are so bulky it can be extremely difficult to store them, so celery leaf soups, stews and pestos are the perfect solution. They look so pretty as well with the vibrant bright green shining through.

Ingredients

To make this celery, apple and blue cheese soup you will need:

  • Olive oil
  • Onions
  • Garlic cloves
  • Green apples
  • Celery stalks
  • Fresh sage leaves
  • Dried oregano
  • Celery leaves (optional)
  • Vegetable stock
  • Blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste
Celery leaves | ProperFoodie
onions | ProperFoodie
apples | ProperFoodie
celery apple and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Growing celery

  • Celery needs its space to grow fully and its surprising how much it will spread. So leave plenty of room between plants.
  • Celery is ready to harvest when the sticks are around 20cm or more in length.
  • Healthy celery has upright stems which snap. Stems should not be limp and bendy.
  • Leaves should be fresh, crisp and a darker green to the rest of the plant
  • When harvesting try to keep the stem connected at the base and store as a whole plant. This helps to keep its freshness. Celery can be kept in the fridge for several weeks.
  • The leaves are less easy to store as they are quite bulky and there can be a lot just on one plant. They are also at their freshest and tastiest just after being removed from the stems. Therefore, remove and use as soon as you can. If you can't use all the leaves place washed leftovers in a bowl, cover with cling film and keep in the fridge for up to a week.
  • If using the stalks in a recipe, use a peeler and scrape away the outer layer, which will remove the stringy bits which can be quite annoying if they get stuck in your teeth.
  • If you're making this soup in a big batch for freezing, leave the blue cheese out and add later. Defrost, reheat and then melt in the cheese before serving. The fresh cheese really adds to the taste of the soup and helps bring it back to life. It also means you'll have some cheese leftover for a pretty topping.
  • Not a fan of blue cheese? Then leave it out. Its still a very tasty dish with plenty of flavour. Or you could always replace with a different cheese - I imagine a cream cheese would work really well.

Other autumnal recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

celery, apple and blue cheese garden soup | ProperFoodie
Print

Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Garden Soup

A hearty celery soup with sweet apples and blue cheese. Perfect for a cold, autumnal night.
Course Appetizer, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 223kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 Onions peeled and chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 300 g of sweet green eating apples core removed and roughly chopped
  • 450 g celery stalks peeled to remove the stringy bits and chopped
  • 10 fresh sage leaves
  • 5 g oregano leaves or half teaspoon dried oregano
  • 250 g celery leaves washed and roughly chopped
  • 700 ml vegetable stock
  • 100 g blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

  • In a large stock pan heat the olive oil, add the garlic and onions, then gently cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next add the apples, celery stalks, sage and oregano. Stir well before pouring in the stock.
  • Bring to a simmer and then add the celery leaves. Mix well to help the leave to wilt.
  • Pop on the lid and leave to simmer gently for 20 minutes, check occasionally.
  • Once the celery and apple have softened remove from the heat and ladle the soup into a blender. Blend on high for 5 minutes to ensure the soup in nice a smooth, then return to the pan. To create a perfectly smooth consistency; sieve the soup back into the pan (make sure you push as much through the sieve as possible, otherwise some flavour may be lost).
  • (if freezing your soup, stop at this point and ladle into seal-able containers - add blue cheese and seasoning when ready to defrost and reheat)
  • Put the blended, sieved soup back on a low heat and melt in the blue cheese. Taste and add more cheese if desired and season.

Nutrition

Serving: 338g | Calories: 223kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 1241mg | Potassium: 702mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 1412IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 243mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/feed/ 4
Chocolate Brownies Recipe https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/ https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/#comments Thu, 09 Feb 2017 15:37:34 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3401 Light and crumbly chocolate brownies dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chunks, finished off with a melted chocolate topping.  Incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness! Home baking The actual making and baking of these chocolate brownies is so simple and easy. There is no need for a food mixer and no waiting around for hours,...

Read More

The post Chocolate Brownies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Light and crumbly chocolate brownies dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chunks, finished off with a melted chocolate topping.  Incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness!

chocolate brownies with hazelnut

Home baking

The actual making and baking of these chocolate brownies is so simple and easy. There is no need for a food mixer and no waiting around for hours, patiently checking whether your baking-masterpiece has finished cooking. This is a straight forward recipe using just a couple of bowls, a whisk and plenty of love. For brownies that don't require any slicing up at the end, have a try of brownie chocolate muffins.

If you are looking for more baking inspiration there's plenty to have a go at in the dessert section of the website. I highly recommend my bakewell tart as it is one of my absolute favourites!

I am a nutritionist, and yes, some would say I am meant to promote lettuce and avocados, but sometimes we all need a little chocolate in our lives and so today I'm promoting homemade baking and 'everything in moderation'.

chocolate brownie fresh out of the oven

How to make chocolate brownies

Start by melting the chocolate. Whisk the eggs and sugar separately until pale, combine everything into a bowl and mix together. Pour mixture into a baking tin and place into a pre-heated oven (180°) and set the timer for half an hour.

Check to see if the brownie is fully cooked by inserting a skewer into the centre. If it comes out a little gooey after 30 minutes return to the oven for another 5 minutes, before checking again.

Leave to completely cool before removing from its tin. I've made the mistake of being super eager to get it out of the tin in the past, and that usually ends in disaster, with the top half of the cake on the cooling rack and the bottom half still in the tin. So take heed, and leave it for a good hour or even 2 hours if you can.

Run a knife around the edge of the tin and gently turn out onto a board or wire rack (as it will be completely cool by this point, I prefer to use a board).

Divide into 25 little squares.

The decoration for these chocolate brownies is even more chocolate: two types to be exact, which I simply melted in the microwave, transferred to a small piping bag and then roughly piped over each brownie.

You can of course decorate however you prefer, just leave plain or even whip up a bit of cream to pop on top if you like!

chocolate brownies with hazelnut

Chocolate brownies recipe ingredients

The ingredients you will need to make this recipe are:

  • 220g unsalted butter
  • 280g milk chocolate chips
  • 4 medium eggs
  • 300g golden caster sugar
  • 100g plain flour
  • 100g cocoa powder
  • 100g chopped hazel nuts
  • 100g white chocolate chips
  • Butter and icing sugar to line the tin
  • 100g milk chocolate 100g white chocolate for decoration

Why are my chocolate brownies dry?

This recipe is to achieve a light and crumbly brownie, however if your aiming to make your chocolate brownies gooey you will need to add more of the chocolate and butter elements to tip the balance towards fudgy rather than cakey. modify this recipe by increasing the unsalted butter to 250g and the milk chocolate chips to 300g.

Dry brownies are usually a result of a higher ratio of drier ingredients like the flour and cocoa powder as opposed to the butter and chocolate elements, also a reduced cooking time will help your cake to retain some of its moisture. Don't forget your brownies won't firm up until completely cool, so remove them from the oven in time to allow for this if required.

How do I know when my brownies are done?

To test whether your chocolate brownies are ready take a skewer or the tip of a knife and pierce the cake in the centre, as you draw the knife or skewer out notice whether there is any brownie sticking to the blade. If you are looking for a light and crumbly or 'cakey' brownie you want the knife/skewer to come out clean. If you want a gooey or 'fudge like' brownie you want a little of the inside to come with it, make sure the skewer is hot though as this indicates the brownie is hot to the centre and not under done.

Do you leave brownies to cool in the tin?

Yes! I leave my brownies to cool in the tin. In the past I have been too eager to get at my brownies and have disturbed them before they've had a chance to firm up enough to stay in one piece.  Brownies ideally should be removed from the oven just as the centre is firming up, this allows for them to finish on the worktop before they cool down. The result is a brownie that is easily turned out onto a board without being too dry in the middle.

📖 Recipe

Chocolate brownies chocolate on chocolate
Print

Hazelnut and White Chocolate Brownies

Hazelnut & white Chocolate brownies with chocolate decoration - perfect for keeping things sweet this valentines
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, pudding
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Calories 210kcal

Ingredients

  • 220 g Unsalted butter
  • 280 g Milk chocolate chips
  • 4 medium eggs
  • 300 g golden caster sugar
  • 100 g plain flour
  • 100 g cocoa powder
  • 100 g chopped hazel nuts
  • 100 g white chocolate chunks/chips

Equipment

  • 1 square 9 inch x 9 inch baking tin

Extras

  • Butter and icing sugar to line the tin and prevent sticking
  • 100 g milk chocolate and 100g white chocolate for decorating if desired

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Butter the baking tin and dust with icing sugar, this will prevent the brownie from sticking during baking.
  • Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with the 280g of chocolate chips. Microwave in 20 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted. (NB: with the butter mixed in, this won't take long to melt at all).
  • Place the melted chocolate and butter to one side.
  • In a mixing bowl whisk together the sugar and eggs. The mix of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon. However, to achieve a good sabayon there is no room for gentle mixing: get your muscles out and whisk well until the mixture goes paler and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.
  • Pour the melted chocolate and butter into the sabayon and stir in well. Then sieve in the flour and cocoa powder and use a spatula to gently fold in. It will appear quite dry at first, but keep folding and eventually the mixture will come together. Finally add the hazelnuts and white chocolate, and fold in again, before gently transferring to the prepared baking tin. use a knife or spatula to spread the mixture evenly in the tin.
  • Pop in the oven for 30 minutes, then check by inserting a skewer into the centre of the cake. If the skewer comes out gooey then put back in for a further 5 minutes. Check again and return to the oven if required, do not bake past 45 minutes as the edges of the brownie will begin to burn.
  • Once fully baked, leave on the side, in the tin, to completely cool. This usually takes 1-2 hours.
  • Only remove from the tin once you are satisfied that the brownie is complete cooled.
  • To remove, run a knife around the edge of the tin, then place a board over the top of the tin and gently turn over to release the brownie.
  • Cut up the slab into suitably sized square pieces: I usually cut off the edges first to remove any charring and to neaten up. Then divide into 20-25 small squares.

If you would like to decorate the brownies as in the pictures:

  • Melt 100g of white chocolate in the microwave (20 second bursts), then transfer to a piping bag, snip off the end and roughly pipe chocolate zig zags over each brownie. Repeat this with milk chocolate, then leave on the side to fully set.

Nutrition

Serving: 46g | Calories: 210kcal | Carbohydrates: 12.6g | Protein: 4.1g | Fat: 16.3g | Saturated Fat: 8.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5.9g | Fiber: 0.7g | Sugar: 8.8g

Pin for later

Imagine light, crumbly chocolate brownies, dotted with hazelnuts and white chocolate chucks, then finished off with zig zags of melted chocolate. Then imagine surprising that special someone with these incredibly tasty squares of chocolate goodness, made just for them, by you, with your own amazing baking skills!

The post Chocolate Brownies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hazelnut-white-chocolate-brownies/feed/ 16
Quick Chicken and Almond Curry https://properfoodie.com/quick-chicken-and-almond-curry/ https://properfoodie.com/quick-chicken-and-almond-curry/#comments Thu, 20 Jul 2017 12:31:34 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4508 Its time for a quick chicken curry!! A one pan meal, prepared and cooked in under 30 minutes with all the taste and flavour of an Indian take away. Chicken and almond Curry Sometime the body craves a good old British curry and our tummies will not be satisfied with anything less. With takeaways and...

Read More

The post Quick Chicken and Almond Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Its time for a quick chicken curry!! A one pan meal, prepared and cooked in under 30 minutes with all the taste and flavour of an Indian take away.

chicken and almond curry

Chicken and almond Curry

Sometime the body craves a good old British curry and our tummies will not be satisfied with anything less.

With takeaways and curry houses all over the place, its no hardship to pop out and fulfil that need to gorge on a rich lamb rogan josh or creamy chicken korma. And of course there's always plenty of room for popadums, and samosa,  and naan bread. . . and you can't just get one type can you - - you have to try the peshwari naan and the chilli naan and ooh what about a coriander naan  🙄

Easy chicken and almond curry

It can all get out of control very quickly. Trust me I know - I have been there, I have walked the dark path of shame the next morning with a slight garlic hangover and huge bloated belly.

So, what to do?? Obviously you know I'm going to tell that you can make it yourself. And homemade curry is one of the most satisfying things to eat, once you've gone to the effort of making it! My usual chicken tikka curry, although fantastic, does take a while to make and does including the making of your own tikka paste. Likewise for my super authentic Thai green curry with Thai green curry paste, Thai red curry with Thai red curry paste and Massaman curry with Massaman curry paste. All very nice, and great if you have the whole day to cook and you're after a romantic dinner recipe for a cosy night in. But not great when its late and you need a curry - right now.

The point of this recipe was to create a tasty authentic curry dish, with minimal ingredients and time, but maximum flavour and enjoyment. The fact that this can also be thrown into one pan really saves on time and washing up. I do like a one pan meal and even like to make my own fish biryani rice dish in the tradition dum way (steaming everything in one pot).

Easy chicken curry ingredients

So here they are - the basic ingredients needed to make a great, simple, healthy and super quick chicken curry

  • Chicken breast
  • Bell pepper
  • Tinned tomatoes
  • Curry powder
  • Ground almonds
  • Garlic
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh coriander
  • Flaked almonds

No coconut milk, or yogurt or cream or lashings of oil. This is curry, at its best, without the overload of fat and calories.

Easy chicken curry ingredients

How to make quick chicken curry

To make this dish, all you need to do is pop everything into one big pan. - I promise its that straight forward. I usually start by sprinkling the raw chicken with the curry powder and adding a bit of seasoning.

Curry powder on to chicken

The chicken is then quickly fried off in a hot griddle pan with the addition of fresh coriander stalks. The griddle pan really speeds up the cooking process and is what makes this recipe 'super quick'.

chicken curry powder and fresh coriander

Once the chicken is browned off and cooked through, everything else is added to the pan - in no particular order. Then stirred and simmered for a few minutes - so it looks like this ↓

Quick chicken and almond curry

YUMMY!!

How do I make my chicken curry sauce thicker?

The griddle pan is also really useful for helping to create a nice thick sauce, as it quickly evaporates away any excess water from the tinned tomatoes.

Quick chicken and almond curry

And thats it - done - serve up, top with yogurt and toasted, flaked almonds (optional!!) and tuck in!

Easy chicken and almond curry

I personally find this chicken curry to be fantastic on its own, particularly if its mid week and I'm trying to eat healthily. However, a bit of rice or roti bread will help make this a truly, great Indian feast.

chicken and almond curry

Other chicken recipes you can make in a hurry

📖 Recipe

quick chicken curry
Print

Quick Chicken and Almond Curry

Its time for curry!! A one pan meal, prepared and cooked in under 30 minutes with all the taste and flavour of an Indian take away.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 453.6kcal

Ingredients

  • 400 g Chicken breast diced fat trimmed off
  • 30 g fresh coriander separate the stems from the leaves
  • 2 teaspoon medium curry powder
  • 2 cloves of garlic crushed
  • Sea salt and Black pepper
  • Half tablespoon olive/coconut oil
  • 400 g tinned chopped tomatoes plus 1 can refilled with water
  • 20 g ground almonds
  • 100 g orange bell pepper roughly chopped
  • juice of half a lemon

Optional:

  • 1 tablespoon fat free Greek Yogurt
  • 10 g Toasted almond flakes

Equipment:

  • Griddle pan

Instructions

  • For best and quickest results use a large griddle pan for cooking. Food items will cook a lot quicker using this method so remember to check and stir regularly.
  • 1.Firstly prepare the fresh coriander by separating the stems from the leaves. Place the leaves to one side for later. Finely chop the stems and also place to one side.
  • 2.Next dice the chicken into 2cm cubes and place in a large bowl. Add the curry powder, coriander stems, crushed garlic, salt and pepper and mix well to fully coat in the seasoning.
  • 3.Place the griddle pan on a medium-high heat and add the oil. Then add the seasoned chicken to the griddle pan and fry off evenly, using a wooden spoon to stir and turn the chicken. Once the chicken is cooked and a golden brown colour on all sides, add the bell pepper, tinned tomatoes, ground almonds, and stir well. Refill the tomato can with tap water and place to one side.
  • 4.Bring the curry to a gently simmer and cook for 5-10 minutes. Place a lid over the pan during this time, if you have one. Check regularly and gradually add the water from the tomato can if the sauce begins to get too dry.
  • 5.Add the lemon juice, stir and remove from the heat.
  • 6.Taste and add more seasoning or lemon juice if desired.
  • 7.Finally, roughly chop the coriander leaves and add to the curry before serving.
  • Serve in bowls topped with yogurt and flaked almonds.
  • NB: If cooking up a large batch the curry can be transferred to sealable containers and frozen for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Serving: 493g | Calories: 453.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 12.9g | Protein: 69.8g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 560mg | Sugar: 10.5g

The post Quick Chicken and Almond Curry appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/quick-chicken-and-almond-curry/feed/ 14
Spiced Pumpkin Muffins https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pumpkin-muffins-dates/ https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pumpkin-muffins-dates/#comments Sat, 31 Oct 2020 01:11:38 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5064 Spiced pumpkin muffins made with fresh or canned pumpkin puree, soaked dates and warming spices. They are fluffy and moist and full of autumnal flavour, perfect for an afternoon treat on a cold and blustery day. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Pumpkin muffins are my favourite way to use up any pumpkin leftovers from...

Read More

The post Spiced Pumpkin Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Spiced pumpkin muffins made with fresh or canned pumpkin puree, soaked dates and warming spices. They are fluffy and moist and full of autumnal flavour, perfect for an afternoon treat on a cold and blustery day.

Pumpkin muffins on a round, bronze cooling rack with two of the muffins stacked one on top of the other.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Pumpkin muffins are my favourite way to use up any pumpkin leftovers from Halloween. I just half and deseed the pumpkin and then get it in the oven to roast for half an hour. The soft, caramelised pumpkin flesh can then be blended into a puree, ready to go into the muffin mix.

The muffin mixture itself takes just 10 minutes to whip together and doesn't require a machine. These moist, spiced pumpkin muffins will fill your house with the aroma of warming spices and sweet pumpkin. Great served warm out of the oven and extra special when served with a cinnamon cream cheese icing (mascarpone, cream, vanilla pod seeds and cinnamon).

🥘 Ingredients

To make 12 - 14 spiced pumpkin muffins you will need:

Ingredients to make pumpkins muffins with text overlay: plain flour, pumpkin, brown sugar, golden syrup, dates, ground ginger, egg, butter, cinnamon, bicarb of soda.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Pumpkin: I like to use a fresh pumpkin in this recipe but you can also use 1 tin of pumpkin puree if you prefer. If you do decide to use fresh pumpkin, pick a small one weighing around 1kg. In terms of the type of pumpkin any variety of winter squash will do. If you are struggling to get hold of a pumpkin you can use butternut squash instead.

Golden syrup: This is a UK based product and is best not substituted if it can be helped. Its thick and smooth with a golden colour and has a unique sweet, caramel, buttery taste. If you can't find it in your local store you can easily make your own golden syrup.

Bicarbonate of soda: This is the same as baking soda or sodium bicarbonate.

Spices: I use cinnamon and ginger in this recipe, but feel free to try with other spices such as nutmeg, cardamom, allspice, or, if you have it, pumpkin pie spice.

Dates: These are optional but I love the fibrous texture and intense caramel flavour that they give. They work best if they are soaked in a little warm water before going into the mix.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a muffin tray with muffin liners. Slice the pumpkin in half, remove the seeds and roast for 30 minutes or until soft and slightly caramelised.
  2. Meanwhile, roughly chop the dates and soak in 100ml of warm water, allowing them to slowly fall apart.
  3. In a large bowl mix together the flour, bicarb of soda, cinnamon and ginger.
  4. Melt the butter, brown sugar, and golden syrup over a low heat in a small pan.4 images showing steps 1-4 for making pumpkin muffins: 1. roast pumpkin, 2. soak dates, 3. mix dry ingredients, 4. melt butter, sugar and syrup.
  5. Remove the roasted pumpkin from the oven, peel or slice off the skin and roughly slice up the flesh.
  6. Use a hand blender or blending machine to blend the roast pumpkin into a puree.
  7. Next add the melted butter and sugar mixture to the flour and spices mixture, followed by the soaked dates (including water) and the pumpkin puree.
  8. Carefully mix and fold everything together until fully combined.4 images showing steps 5-8 for making pumpkin muffins: 5. slice roasted pumpkin, 6. blend pumpkin, 7. add wet to dry ingredients, 8. mix
  9. Next whisk up the egg and gradually add to the muffin mixture, stirring well between each addition.
  10. Finally, spoon the muffin mix into the muffin liners. Leave a small gap at the top (½ cm) to allow the muffins to rise in the oven. Bake at 180°C (350°F) for 30 minutes.2 images showing steps 9 and 10 for making pumpkin muffins: 9. add whisked egg to cake mix, 10. scoop mix into muffins liners

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should the muffins be stored?

Allow to fully cool then place in an air tight container. If you need to layer the muffins in the container, then place a paper towel between each layer. Muffins will keep well for 3-4 days.

Can the muffins be frozen?

Once baked allow to cool then either place in an air tight container or wrap in a double layer of cling film. Then freeze for up to 3 moths. To defrost leave on the side for a few hours or microwave in 30 second bursts until slightly warmed through.

Do you have to use liners for muffins?

Strictly speaking you don't have to use liners. You could just grease your muffin tray and pour the muffin mix straight into it.

However, liners do make life so much easier. No greasing required and the muffins come out of tray without any difficulty. The liners also make the muffins easier to handle and serve and they will also help to keep them fresher for longer.

Half of a round cooling rack visible, with pumpkin muffins resting on top in their liners

🍰 Other Autumn baking recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Pumpkin muffins on a round, bronze cooling rack with two of the muffins stacked one on top of the other.
Print

Spiced Pumpkin Muffins

Spiced pumpkin muffins made with fresh or canned pumpkin puree, soaked dates and warming spices. They are fluffy and moist and full of autumnal flavour, perfect for an afternoon treat on a cold and blustery day.
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 45 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 14 muffins
Calories 249kcal

Equipment

  • Muffin tray and muffin liners
  • Roasting tray (to roast fresh pumpkin)
  • Blender or hand blender (to puree roasted fresh pumpkin)
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small pan

Ingredients

  • 1 small pumpkin/squash 1kg or 1 can Pumpkin puree
  • 100 g dates and 100ml of warm water
  • 250 g Plain flour
  • 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda
  • 2 teaspoon Cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoon Ginger
  • 150 g Butter
  • 150 g Brown sugar
  • 100 g Golden syrup
  • 1 large egg

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180°C (350°F) and line a muffin tray with muffin liners.
  • Slice the pumpkin in half, remove the seeds and roast for 30 minutes or until soft and slightly caramelised.
  • Meanwhile, roughly chop the dates and soak in 100ml of warm water, allowing them to slowly fall apart.
  • In a large bowl mix together the flour, bicarb of soda, cinnamon and ginger.
  • Melt the butter, brown sugar, and golden syrup over a low heat in a small pan.
  • Remove the roasted pumpkin from the oven, peel or slice off the skin and roughly slice up the flesh.
  • Use a hand blender or blending machine to blend the roast pumpkin into a puree.
  • Next add the melted butter and sugar mixture to the flour and spices mixture, followed by the soaked dates (including water) and the pumpkin puree.
  • Carefully mix and fold everything together until fully combined.
  • Next whisk up the egg and gradually add to the muffin mixture, stirring well between each addition.
  • Finally, spoon the muffin mix into the muffin liners. Leave a small gap at the top (½ cm) to allow the muffins to rise in the oven.
  • Bake at 180°C (350°F) for 30 minutes or until an inserted skewer comes out clean. Then transfer to a wire rack to cool

Notes

Substitutions:
  • Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
  • Pumpkin: Use 1 small (1kg) fresh pumpkin/squash or 1 can of pumpkin puree.
  • Golden syrup: This is a UK based product and is best not substituted if it can be helped. If you can't find it in your local store you can easily make your own.
  • Bicarbonate of soda: This is the same as baking soda or sodium bicarbonate.
  • Spices: Ginger and cinnamon can be replaced or added to with nutmeg, cardamom, allspice or pumpkin pie spice.
  • Dates: optional. Work best if they are soaked in a little warm water before going into the mix.
How should the muffins be stored?
Allow to fully cool then place in an air tight container. If you need to layer the muffins in the container, then place a paper towel between each layer. Muffins will keep well for 3-4 days.
Can the muffins be frozen?
Once baked allow to cool then either place in an air tight container or wrap in a double layer of cling film. Then freeze for up to 3 moths. To defrost leave on the side for a few hours or microwave in 30 second bursts until slightly warmed through.
Do you have to use liners for muffins?
Strictly speaking you don't have to use liners. You could just grease your muffin tray and pour the muffin mix straight into it.
However, liners do make life so much easier. No greasing required and the muffins come out of tray without any difficulty. The liners also make the muffins easier to handle and serve and they will also help to keep them fresher for longer.

Nutrition

Calories: 249kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 35mg | Sodium: 163mg | Potassium: 330mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 6365IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with new images, an improved recipe, new step-by-step photos and new recipe tips.

The post Spiced Pumpkin Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pumpkin-muffins-dates/feed/ 22
Beetroot Hummus https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/ https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/#comments Sat, 07 Jul 2018 15:42:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7013 AD FEATURE FOR ENGLISH PROVENDER Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever. Its been a good while since I've posted on here - mainly due to sunning myself in Sardinia (more about that soon), but...

Read More

The post Beetroot Hummus appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
AD FEATURE FOR ENGLISH PROVENDER

Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever.

Baby beetroot hummus

Its been a good while since I've posted on here - mainly due to sunning myself in Sardinia (more about that soon), but also because we've been busy finishing off our pizza oven build - and ......its nearly ready!! So exciting - I can't wait to get cooking in our little outdoor oven (named Alberto by the way, after the owner of our B&B in Verona, where we got married last year 🙂

Baby beetroot hummus

Outdoor cooking

In preparation for some downright, awesome, alfresco cooking I have been stock piling recipes that are perfect for any kind of outdoor feast, including steak and veggie BBQ skewers, roasted stuffed peppers with cous cous in cheese sauce and some lovely homemade mint ice cream lollies. This sweet and earthy beetroot hummus is another one of these recipes and will go with anything - in fact I have a little idea bubbling away involving beetroot hummus on a pizza - I really think it will work and I'm definitely doing this before the end of Summer.

beetroot hummus with shredded beetroot

Hummus

Hummus? Houmous? Tesco Hummus? Waitrose Hummus? Whatever you call it or where you buy it, hummus is the dip that really knows how to please all tastes a preferences. There are so many flavours now-a-days that its hard to keep up. I do love a nice harrissa-flavoured, Moroccan style hummus, but I also love hummus with peas and mint. Or just plain hummus - its all great.

sweet pickled beetroot hummus

Beetroot hummus

This being said, beetroot hummus (especially with some creamy horseradish) is by far my most favourite kind of hummus. But I do feel that making it from scratch is the only way to really appreciate this colourful little dip. And heres my top tip for the bestest, most smoothest homemade hummus ever . . .

beetroot hummus

Shelled Chickpeas

. . .shell your chickpeas!! And this isn't really that hard at all. It might be a little time consuming, but oh so worth it. If you haven't shelled chickpeas before all you need to do is drain the tinned chickpeas into a sieve and rinse under tap water. Then take each chickpea and gently rub your fingertips over the surface and loosen the outer skin. The inner pea should then pop out of the skin. Discard the skin and place the chickpea in a bowl. Continue until all your chickpeas are shelled. Easy.

These little chickpeas are the star of the show, so it really is worth the extra effort.

beetroot hummus with horseradish and creme fraiche dressing

The rest of the recipe is super easy - all the ingredient go into a blender and are blitz until smooth.

Happy dipping!

 15 minutes to make recipeunder 100 calories recipeVegetarian recipeGluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

Baby beetroot hummus
Print

Beetroot Hummus

Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever.
Course party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine Moroccan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 People
Calories 59.6kcal

Ingredients

For the Beetroot Hummus

  • 400 g tin of Chickpeas 120g drained
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped or ½ tablespoon Very Lazy Chopped Smoked Garlic
  • Pinch sea salt
  • .5 Juice of a lemon
  • 2 cooked baby beetroots
  • 2 tablespoon beetroot pickle I used English Provender beetroot pickle
  • 1 tablespoon tahini paste sesame seed paste

For the dressing

  • 1 tablespoon creme fraiche
  • 1 teaspoon horseradish sauce

Optional

  • Extra oil and black pepper for serving

Instructions

To make the Beetroot Hummus

  • Drain the chickpeas into a sieve and rinse well under the tap. Peel off the outer shell of the chickpeas by rubbing with your finger tips until the inner pea pops out. Discard the shell and place the chickpea in a bowl. Continue until all chickpeas are shelled.
  • Shelled chickpeas produces and smoother and more flavoursome hummus.
  • In a blender blitz together all the hummus ingredients until smooth: shelled chickpeas, oil, garlic, salt, lemon juice, 2 cooked baby beets, 2 tablespoon beetroot pickle, and 1 tablespoon tahini paste.
  • Transfer the hummus into a bowl and chill in the fridge.

For the horseradish dressing

  • In a small bowl mix together the creme fraiche and horseradish sauce - season if desired.

Serve

  • Spoon the horseradish dressing over the bowl of chilled hummus. Drizzle over oil and grind on some black pepper if desired, then serve.

Nutrition

Serving: 41g | Calories: 59.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 4.5g | Protein: 2.1g | Fat: 3.8g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 160mg | Sugar: 1.2g

PIN FOR LATER

beetroot hummus with horseradish creme fraiche dressing

The post Beetroot Hummus appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/feed/ 4
Fig Jam https://properfoodie.com/fig-jam/ https://properfoodie.com/fig-jam/#comments Mon, 24 Sep 2018 10:52:33 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7565 Soft & delicate fig jam recipe with nutty, crunchy seeds & a squeeze of tangy lemon Tis the season for figs!! And to make the most of this lovely fruit I've made myself a few jars of sticky fig jam preserve. A simple fig jam recipe or easy fig and balsamic chutney recipe are favourites of mine....

Read More

The post Fig Jam appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Soft & delicate fig jam recipe with nutty, crunchy seeds & a squeeze of tangy lemon

Fig jam

Tis the season for figs!! And to make the most of this lovely fruit I've made myself a few jars of sticky fig jam preserve. A simple fig jam recipe or easy fig and balsamic chutney recipe are favourites of mine. You can't beat the amazing taste, texture and crunch of seeds that you only get from figs - its almost like popping candy, only a whole lot better for you.

Figs

September and November are amazing months for all kinds of fruits and berries. Apples, blackberries, apricots, plums, pears - just so many. But my favourite, making it to first place just ahead of stewed apples, is the lovely little fig. With its thin skin, soft texture, nutty flavour and a million crunchy seeds; the fresh fig really is a special treat.

figs

Seeds in figs

- The fig fruit is actually a false fruit or accessory fruit, which basically means that the flowers or seeds grow inside it rather than the fruit forming from the flower.

Fruit, flower, or false fruit it all makes for good jam.

Fig jam

How to make fig jam

This is a simple fig jam recipe is made with just 3 ingredients, in one pan, and simmered for no more than 30 minutes. As fresh figs have a borderline acid pH, its advised to add acid to the jam - usually lemon juice. The acid helps to preserve the fruit correctly.

Fig jam with no pectin

Many jam recipes suggest the addition of pectin to allow the jam to gel quicker and be jelly-like. Pectin reduces cooking time in jams where the fruit contains less natural pectin and so normally take a while to gel. Figs contain enough natural pectin for jam making and so no extra pectin is required in a fig jam recipe.

Once the figs have been simmering for 20-30 minutes the natural pectin will bind with the sugar and become jelly-like. In order to test if the jam is ready, spoon a little onto a cold plate. As the jam cools push slightly with your finger  - the jam should wrinkle showing that it has a jelly consistency.

Fig jam and croissants

Fig jam uses

I love fig jam on warm croissants, theres something so great about having really chunky pieces of jam on all that buttery croissant goodness. Fig jam is also fabulous in desserts or as toppings for desserts, I particularly like to add jam to my galette recipe. The galette recipe also includes instruction on how to make an amazing rhubarb jam recipe! For something a little different in the morning, try fig jam as a breakfast topping for yogurt or porridge.

Storing jams

The addition of lemon juice, as mentioned above, will help to preserve the fruit correctly. However, bacteria can still be present in the storage jars before the jam goes in. In order to prevent anything nasty getting into my jars I sterilise the jar and lid and ensure that my jam goes into the jar whilst still hot.

To sterilise my jars I usually wash them thoroughly and then place them on a baking tray in the oven for 5-10 minutes at 150 degrees C (alternatively put through the dishwasher on a hot wash).
I use a clean metal funnel to transfer the hot jam into the jars and then screw the lids on tightly. I use marigold gloves to enable handling hot jars and jam. Make sure your jam is still hot when you place it in the jars and screw on the lid. As the jam cools, a tighter seal will form between the jar and lid.

You can check if a tight seal has been formed by pressing down on the centre of the lid once cooled. - If sealed with a vacuum the lid shouldn't depress further. This seal check and the sterilising of the jars in the oven should be enough to ensure the jam keeps well.

Fig jam

Equipment for making jam and chutney

Please note that the below products are affiliate links, which means if you do click these links and then go on to purchase the products, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

I used the following products to make my jars of jam: Nutley's 110ml Hexagonal Glass Jam Chutney Preserve Jar (Pack of 12),  50 Buff Strung Tags 70mm x 35mmKitchenCraft Home Made Stainless Steel Adjustable Jam Funnel

What else can I preserve?

For more ideas on preserving fruit have a look at my chutney recipes, which are both fantastic at Christmas and as Christmas gifts: Fig, apple and balsamic Chutney and Spiced pear and cider chutney. If you're after a substitute for fig jam try this recipe with strawberries instead of figs.

Fig jam and croissants

30 minutes to makeunder 100 calories recipeVegetarian recipeGluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

Fig jam
Print

Fig Jam

Soft & delicate fig jam preserve with nutty, crunchy seeds & a squeeze of tangy lemon
Course Snack
Cuisine British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 16 servings (50g/serving)
Calories 56.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 500 g figs (10-12 figs)
  • 175 g Granulated Sugar
  • Juice of 1 lemon
  • 100 ml water

Instructions

  • First place a small plate in the fridge to chill. 
    Then prepare the figs by chopping off the stems and slicing into quarters. 
  • Place a large pan on a medium heat. Add the figs, sugar and water to the pan and bring to the boil. Turn the heat down and simmer for 20 minutes. Stir regularly.
  • Squeeze in the lemon juice and mix well. Simmer for a further 5 minutes.
  • Test to see if the jam is ready by spooning a small amount onto the chilled plate from the fridge. As the jam cools on the plate, push it slightly with your finger. If ready the jam should wrinkle, indicating that it will become jelly-like as it cools. If not, simmer for a further 2 minutes and test again,  - repeat until ready.
  • If using immediately, transfer to a bowl, cool and then chill in the fridge before serving.

To tranfer and store jam in jars

  • Sterilise your jars and lids by washing thoroughly, then place on a baking tray and put into the oven at 150 degrees C for 5-10minutes. 
  • Remove the jars from the oven. Whilst the jars and jam are still hot transfer the jam into the jars using a clean metal funnel (see links above for the equipment that I use). Use marigold gloves to handle the hot jars and hot jam.
  • Make sure the edges of the jar are clean before tightly screwing on the lids - again use marigold gloves as the jars will still be hot. Allow to cool.
  • As the jam cools a tight vacuum seal will form. This can be tested by pressing in the centre of the lid once fully cool. If properly sealed the lid should not depress when pressed.
  • If the lid does depress the jars will need to be further processed by placing in a water bath: Place the jars into a high sided pan and fill the pan with hot water up to half way up on the jars (water bath). Process the jars by putting the pan over a medium heat and boiling the water for 5 minutes. 
  • Once a vacuum seal has been formed (pressing lid test) the jars can be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. Once opened, keep in the fridge and consume within 6 weeks
  • If ever in doubt about the seal, always store in the fridge and consume within 6 weeks. 

Nutrition

Serving: 50g | Calories: 56.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 14.5g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.1g | Sugar: 14.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Simple fig jam

The post Fig Jam appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fig-jam/feed/ 1
Bircher muesli with stewed apples https://properfoodie.com/bircher-muesli-with-stewed-apples/ https://properfoodie.com/bircher-muesli-with-stewed-apples/#comments Tue, 09 Oct 2018 21:32:51 +0000 http://www.properfoodie.com/?p=7696 The perfect Bircher muesli made slightly quicker than the original version and served with chilled, stewed apples and apple crisps Bircher Muesli This pretty little bircher dish is my new favourite breakfast, dessert, snack or even late night treat, all rolled into one. - It really does go down very well at any time of...

Read More

The post Bircher muesli with stewed apples appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
The perfect Bircher muesli made slightly quicker than the original version and served with chilled, stewed apples and apple crisps

love real food Bircher muesli

Bircher Muesli

This pretty little bircher dish is my new favourite breakfast, dessert, snack or even late night treat, all rolled into one. - It really does go down very well at any time of day and I'm happy to eat it whenever I can. I promise  - its that good. Its like an apple pie but loads better for you. - Whats not to love!!

What is Bircher muesli?

So what is bircher and why is it suddenly everywhere? Firstly - its more than likely that Bircher is so popular because its just so blimin' good. However, this is not a new recipe, its actually a dish thats been around for over 100 years.

Bircher muesli with stewed apples

The original Bircher Muesli

Muesli first came about in 1900 when Swiss Physician Maximilian Bircher-Brenner introduced the dish to his hospital patients as part of a healthy fruit and veg based diet. Bircher-Brenners recipe was based on a similar dish he had come across whilst in the Swiss-Alps. First, oats were soaked in water and lemon juice overnight  and then mixed with either cream or honey before adding in grated apple, nuts and yogurt.

spiced apple bircher

My quick cinnamon Bircher Muesli

Although similar, my version of this dish includes perfectly stewed apples rather than grated apples and serves the oat mix and apples separately. Why??!! . . . - because this dish is all about celebrating apples - in particular the apples that sprouted out of our first little apple tree up on our allotment / kitchen garden.

apple tree

Little apple tree

After last years lack of fruit on our apple tree we were over the moon to discover 3 perfectly, perfect, crunchy apples this September. So I just had to make something extra special and this lovely apple bircher recipe also happens to tie in perfectly with Apple day on the 21st October.

picking apples

Overnight oats

So admittedly my version does skip out the overnight soaking part. This was in attempt to come up with a quick and simple version of this fabulous recipe. And I will say, rather smugly, that this worked out pretty well. - Using porridge oats, apple juice and mixing in the yogurt straight away means that my Bircher requires just a quick 10 minute chill in the fridge. That said, overnight oats are super popular at the moment -  and I am just a tiny bit in love with my blueberry cheesecake overnight oats, which you can find in my free recipe ebook. So allowing the oats, in this Bircher recipe, some time to soak will do it the world of good. So feel free to chill overnight if you have the time.

Bircher muesli with homemade apple sauce

Stewed apples

So yes the stewed apple thing is my super, unique twist on this traditional, old school dish. I love apple pie and who doesn't love homemade apple sauce? So in order to still fully enjoy my stewed apples, but not feel like a complete pig after stuffing my face with a huge apple pie - and no doubt gallons of custard. - I topped the apples with my Bircher Muesli and apple crisps for the perfect healthy alternative. A sprinkle of nuts to finish it off and there you have my perfect breakfast and dessert and healthy 3pm treat.

Autumnal Bircher muesli with stewed apples

The best apple Bircher muesli

For further details on making the best original and traditional Bircher Muesli and to find out exactly what does and doesn't work, have a read of Felicity Cloakes article. Felicity has tried and tested several popular versions to come up with her perfect Bircher recipe.

Apple Bircher muesli

30 minutes to make recipeunder 500 calories recipevegetarian recipe1 of 5 a day recipe

📖 Recipe

Autumnal Bircher muesli with stewed apples
Print

Bircher Muesli with chilled stewed apples and apple crisps

The perfect Bircher muesli made slightly quicker than the original version and served with chilled stewed apples and apple crisps
Course Breakfast
Cuisine British, Swiss, Swiss-German
Prep Time 30 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 glasses/pots
Calories 322kcal

Ingredients

For the Cinnamon Apple Crisps:

  • 2 small red apples
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

For the Stewed Apples

  • 600 g baking apples (2 large apples)
  • 10 g butter
  • 100 g golden granulated or caster sugar

For the Cinnamon Bircher

  • 75 g porridge oats
  • 225 g natural yogurt
  • 25 ml Apple juice
  • 40 g Sultanas
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

To serve:

  • Chopped hazelnuts

Equipment:

  • Baking tray and greaseproof paper
  • Large pan
  • Mixing bowl
  • Piping bag optional
  • Serving glasses/jars/pots

Instructions

To make the cinnamon apple crisps:

  • Pre heat the oven to 160 degrees fan and prepare a baking tray lined with greaseproof paper.
  • Thinly slice the 2 red apples and remove all pips - the thinner they are the more crisp they will be after baking. Slice straight through removing any stalk or pips as you go. I slice mine at a 90 degree angle to the core, to allow for a star shape in the centre of the crisps where the pips were.
  • Place the sliced apple on the lined baking tray. Try not to overlap the slices as they will stick together during baking. Sprinkle over ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon then bake in the oven for 30 minutes or until crisp. Check them regularly as they will burn quicker than you think. Also as check and remove the smaller thinner ones as necessary as they will bake and crisp up quicker.
  • When crisp, remove from the oven and set to one side to cool. Do not refrigerate as they will go soggy.

To make the stewed apples:

  • Whilst the crisps are baking, start preparing the baking apples. Peel and core then slice into chunks (around 1 cm cubed in size). Place a large pan on a medium heat and add the butter. As the butter starts to melt add the chopped apple and golden sugar. Stir well until the sugar dissolves. Pop on a lid and allow to simmer for 5 minutes of so - check and stir regularly. As soon as the sugar starts to caramelise (turns darker brown) and the apples become soft, remove from the heat. Transfer to a bowl and set to one side to fully cool. Place in the fridge to chill until ready to serve.

To make the bircher:

  • While the crisps and stewed apples are cooling, prepare the bircher. Place the oats, yogurt, apple juice, sultanas and cinnamon into a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined. Add a little more yogurt or apple juice if the mix appears to dry or stiff. Chill in the fridge for at least 10 minutes or until ready to serve or overnight if you have time. (I usually transfer the bircher to a piping bag and secure with a peg before chilling. Piping the bircher on when serving is so much easier and neater)

Putting the dessert together.

  • Once the stewed apples are fully chilled the dessert can be put together. This only takes 5 minutes and so for the freshest of finishes I tend to build these desserts just before I serve them. Line up your serving glasses/pots. Spoon the stewed apples into the bottom of each glass - fill them to about half way. Next pipe or spoon the bircher onto the top of the stewed apples. Top each glass with a couple of apple crisps and sprinkle over the chopped hazelnuts. Serve with extra apple crisps on the side.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 260g | Calories: 322kcal | Carbohydrates: 63.2g | Protein: 6.3g | Fat: 6.7g | Saturated Fat: 2.8g | Sodium: 80mg | Sugar: 50g

PIN FOR LATER

Bircher muesli with stewed apples & apple crisps

I am linking this recipe to #cookblogshare hosted by peachickbakery, hijackedbytwins, recipesmadeeasyeverydayhealthyrecipes and Easypeasyfoodie. I am also linking to #cookonceeattwice by searchingforspice.

The post Bircher muesli with stewed apples appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/bircher-muesli-with-stewed-apples/feed/ 8
Baileys Coffee https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/ https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/#comments Mon, 10 Dec 2018 19:58:07 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8166 Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top! [feast_advanced_jump_to] ☕ Why make this recipe? Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite...

Read More

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!

Baileys coffee made with Baileys Irish Cream

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

☕ Why make this recipe?

Baileys Irish cream is one of my favourite liqueurs to go into a coffee. Its particularly good if you prefer a creamier or milky coffee.

Baileys coffee is super easy to make and all you need is coffee, Baileys Irish Cream, honey and cream.

This particular recipe uses black coffee with Baileys added directly to this. However, a latte coffee (shot of coffee made up with milk) could be used so making a Baileys latte version instead.

Make for an afternoon treat in front of the fire on a colds winter day or whip up this warming baileys beverage for your guests after a festive dinner party.

🥘 Ingredients

To make Baileys coffee for 2 people you will need the following ingredients:

  • 400 ml freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (instant or ground)
  • 2 tsp Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 x 50ml measures of Baileys Irish Cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Coffee: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.

🔪 Instructions

  1. First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  2. Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
  3. Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
  4. Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  5. Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
  6. Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
  7. Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
Baileys coffee - properfoodie - Debbie Jones

💭 Frequently asked questions

How much baileys to add to a baileys coffee

The standard shot size for a measure of Baileys is 50ml (double measure), which is the amount used in this recipe. As Baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure.

When to have Baileys coffee

Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat.

Its also especially good at Christmas. Christmas wouldn't be Christmas without Baileys Irish Cream. I usually take mine on the rocks or even with crushed ice, whilst I'm busy wrapping presents or making one of my Christmas recipes.

Other Christmas recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Baileys latte
Print

Baileys Irish cream with Coffee

Irish cream coffee! Baileys coffee is an easy recipe to serve up at home as afternoon treat or in place of dessert after a meal. Its especially great at Christmas with a bit of nutmeg sprinkled on top!
Course aperitif, aperitivo, beverage, Dessert, digestif, Drinks
Cuisine British, Christmas, irish
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 284kcal

Equipment

  • Coffee Glasses or mugs

Ingredients

  • 400 ml Freshly made black coffee (enough for 2) (Instant or ground)
  • 2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • 2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • 50 ml double cream
  • Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve (optional)

Instructions

  • First heat your mugs or coffee glasses by pouring in warm/boiling water and leaving to warm up for a couple of minutes
  • Next prepare the coffee (instant/ground/machine) - your choice of black or latte coffee. Make enough to fill your mugs or glasses. Allow this to cool for a few minutes before using. If the coffee is too hot the Baileys will curdle when added.
    400 ml Freshly made black coffee
  • Empty the water from the glasses or mugs and add a teaspoon of syrup or honey to the bottom of each glass (the sugar will help the cream to float on top when added later on)
    2 teaspoon Golden syrup or honey
  • Then divide the slightly cooled coffee or latte between to 2 glasses or mugs, leaving around 2 cm of space at the top so the Baileys and cream can be added. Stir well to dissolve the syrup.
  • Next carefully add a measure of Baileys to each glass. If using black coffee try to pour the Baileys in slowly to allow the liqueur to sit nearer the top so creating gradual change in colour down the glass. 
    2 50ml measures of Baileys Irish cream
  • Finally add the cream to the top: Stir the cream well first then pour slowly over the back of a spoon so the cream sits above the Irish coffee. The tip of the spoon should be just touching the surface of the coffee as you pour and the cream should run off the spoon and onto the top of the Baileys coffee.
    50 ml double cream
  • Sprinkle over some freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder and serve.
    Freshly grated nutmeg or cocoa powder to serve

Notes

How much baileys to add to coffee: The standard shot for a measure of baileys is 50ml, which is the amount used in this recipe. As baileys isn't too strong in terms of alcohol content its usual to use a 50ml measure. This amount will also allow for the baileys flavour to be distinguished against the coffee.
Substitutions: black coffee can be replaced with latte coffee (a shot of coffee made up with milk) if you would prefer a creamier version or if you don't want the finished drink to be too strong in terms of coffee flavour and caffeine amount.
When to have Baileys coffee: Baileys coffee is great at any time of year. Particularly after a filling meal, when you can't quite fit in dessert but still want a treat. Its also especially good at Christmas.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 258g | Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 117mg | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 368IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baileys Coffee appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/baileys-irish-cream-with-coffee/feed/ 2
Fish Biryani https://properfoodie.com/fish-biryani/ https://properfoodie.com/fish-biryani/#respond Tue, 09 Apr 2019 17:14:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9595 Lightly spiced fish biryani made with a yogurt biryani sauce and cooked in one pot with layered fish, rice and saffron. Served up with fresh coriander and yogurt dip topped with chilli flakes and oil Fish biryani recipe Biryani isn't really a curry - its a rice dish, a rice dish thats sealed in the...

Read More

The post Fish Biryani appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Lightly spiced fish biryani made with a yogurt biryani sauce and cooked in one pot with layered fish, rice and saffron. Served up with fresh coriander and yogurt dip topped with chilli flakes and oil

fish biryani with yogurt

Fish biryani recipe

Biryani isn't really a curry - its a rice dish, a rice dish thats sealed in the pan and then 'baked' on the stove. Theres no 'curry gravy' going on here. If you are looking for something a little more saucy then a Thai green curry, Thai red curry, Massaman curry, chicken tikka masala curry or chicken and almond curry should do the trick. For a veggie option I always, always opt for a warming and aromatic red lentil tarka dahl.

There is, however, a lovely, creamy, biryani marinade in this recipe. Its used to initially flavour the fish, but is then mostly soaked up into the rice during cooking. The meat for this dish goes in raw and traditionally the biryani recipe uses mutton. However, to keep this dish nice and light and easy to cook I've opted for cod. But any white chunky fish would work well here. I do love a good fish and rice dish and I'm always on the look out for anything that makes this combination a little more interesting. Like my fish kedgeree, haddock and rosemary risotto or giant wild rice salad with salmon and eggs.

Dum biryani

Biryani rice

To produce perfectly cooked rice in a biryani dish, the rice should be briefly cooked to al dente in a pan of simmering water, before transferring to the dum biryani (cooking pot). Traditional recipes and the recipe below use basmati rice, which should fluff up nicely at the end of the cooking process.

fish pot meal

Biryani spices

A mixture of Indian spices are used in a biryani. These include ground coriander, chilli powder and turmeric. The other main spice is biryani masala, however, in this recipe I have used garam masala, which is a more accessible spice. If you would prefer to use biryani masala you can prepare this yourself at home. Have a look at this biryani masala recipe for further details.

biryani with yogurt

What is Dum Biryani?

Traditionally dum biryani is the description of the cooking process. Dum means cooking on low and effectively baking the dish in a sealed container. In this recipe I have tried to replicate this process by cooking the fish biryani is a large pan with the lid on and over a low heat on the stove. The dish is cooked like this for 20 minutes, allowing the fish and rice to cook through until the fish flakes into pieces and the rice is fluffy.

biryani rice

How to make Fish Biryani

  1. In a large bowl mix together the ground coriander, chilli powder, garam masala powder, turmeric, and garlic ginger paste.biryani spices
  2. Next, add yogurt to the spice mix and combine together to form a pastebiryani sauce
  3. Add the fish to the biryani paste and coat well. Then set to one side and allow to marinade for at least 20 minutes.Coat boneless cod in Indian sauce
  4. Meanwhile fry off diced onions and sliced green chillies in a large pan. Cook until golden brown and just starting to char.fry cumin seeds, onion and green pepper
  5. Remove the onions from the heat and add the marinated fish and all the sauce. Add cod in sauce to fried onions
  6. Layer al dente rice (simmered in water for 3 minutes only) over the top of the fishLayer fish biryani with al dente rice
  7. Add lemon juice and saffron soaked in wateradd saffron water and lemon juice
  8. Place on the lid and cook on the stove on low for 20 minutes.dum biryani sealed with lid on and baked on the hob
  9. After 20 minutes remove the lid, mix well and garnish with chopped coriandertop with coriander and serve with yogurt

How do you keep biryani rice from sticking to the pan?

To stop the rice sticking to the bottom of the pan during cooking place the fish and marinade sauce in the bottom of the pan before the rice and make sure the base is fully covered. Diced tomatoes can also be added to the base along with the fish to fully ensure that the rice doesn't stick.

How long can you keep fish biryani in the fridge?

The biryani will keep well in the fridge for 48 hours. Ensure that the biryani is fully cooled before refrigerating.

Can you freeze and reheat rice dishes?

Yes rice dishes can be frozen and reheated, just ensure the rice is completely cooled before going in the freezer. When reheating make sure the rice is fully defrosted then, for best results add a splash of water and reheat in the microwave.

OTHER CURRY RECIPES:

For more recipe ideas for a cosy night in have a look at my romantic dinner recipes post.

1 hour to produceunder 500 kcal recipeHigh in protein recipegluten free recipepost workout mealbetter than takeaways recipe

📖 Recipe

Fish biryani
Print

Fish Biryani

Lightly spiced fish biryani made with a yogurt biryani sauce and cooked in one pot with layered fish, rice and saffron. The dish is served with fresh coriander and extra yogurt topped with chilli flakes and oil
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine Indian
Prep Time 40 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 480.5kcal

Ingredients

For the rice:

  • 300 g Uncooked white basmati rice
  • 600 ml boiling water
  • Pinch of salt

For the biryani marinade:

  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon hot chilli powder
  • 1 teaspoon Garam Masala
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • 1 tablespoon Garlic ginger paste
  • 250 g whole plain natural yogurt
  • 600 g boneless and skinless cod fillets

For the biryani

  • ½ tablespoon oil
  • ½ teaspoon cumin seeds
  • 200 g Red onions finely chopped
  • 5 small green chillies chopped
  • A few Saffron strands
  • 1 juice of a lemon

To serve:

  • Fresh coriander
  • Extra yogurt
  • chilli flakes

Equipment:

  • Large bowl
  • Large pan for cooking rice
  • Large shallow pan with lid

Instructions

To make the rice

  • Add 300g of uncooked rice to a large pan the cover with approximately 600ml boiling water from the kettle. Add a pinch of salt then simmer on medium heat for 3 minutes. After 3 minutes drain and rinse under the cold tap to cool the grains and stop the cooking process. At this point the rice should be barely cooked (al dente). The rice will be fully cooked through later, for now, set to one side.

To make the biryani marinade:

  • In a large bowl mix together ½ teaspoon ground coriander, 1 teaspoon hot chilli powder, 1 teaspoon garam masala powder, ½ teaspoon ground turmeric, and 1 tablespoon garlic ginger paste.
    biryani spices
  • Next, add 250g whole plain yogurt to the spice mix and combine together to form a paste.
    Coat boneless fish in biryani sauce
  • Add the fish to the biryani paste and mix to coat well. Then set to one side and allow to marinade for at least 20 minutes.
    Coat boneless fish in biryani sauce

To make the biryani

  • Whilst the fish in marinating, fry off 200g diced red onions and 5 sliced green chillies in a large pan (one with a lid). Cook until golden brown and just starting to char. Remove the pan from the heat and add the marinated fish and all the sauce.
    fry cumin seeds onion and green pepper
  • Next layer the al dente rice over the top of the fish followed by a squeeze of lemon juice and saffron strands soaked in water for 2 minutes.
    add saffron water and lemon juice to biryani
  • Place the lid on the pan and cook on the stove on low for 20 minutes.
    dum biryani sealed with lid on and baked on the hob
  • After 20 minutes remove the lid, mix well and garnish with chopped coriander.
    top biryani with coriander and serve with yogurt
  • Serve with extra yogurt topped with oil and chilli flakes (optional)

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 354g | Calories: 480.5kcal | Carbohydrates: 73.1g | Protein: 37.4g | Fat: 6.9g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3.2g | Sodium: 240mg | Sugar: 8.3g

The post Fish Biryani appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fish-biryani/feed/ 0
Bakewell Tart https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/ https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/#respond Thu, 18 Apr 2019 14:27:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9710 Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - a dessert that I will never tire of. I simply adore the soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. - Theres just no beating the flavour. Definitely served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still...

Read More

The post Bakewell Tart appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - a dessert that I will never tire of. I simply adore the soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. - Theres just no beating the flavour. Definitely served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still lingers in the air.

raspberry jam bakewell tarts

This sweet, crumbly traditional dessert is a fabulous option to finish off any meal. Its the perfect partner to classic main course like steak and ale pie, healthy fish and chips, minted lamb pie or fish pie.

Why is it called a Bakewell tart?

The Bakewell tart is closely associated with the small town of Bakewell in Derbyshire, England. Although theres no evidence to suggest the tart originated from here, it may well have taken its name from this quintessential town. The Bakewell tart is a variation of the original Bakewell pudding and the bakeries in Bakewell are often found to be selling Bakewell pudding rather than tart.

slices of bakewell tart

What is the difference between Bakewell tart and Bakewell pudding?

The Bakewell tart is made using sweet shortcrust pastry and a frangipane filling, the pudding uses puff pastry and a thicker custard-type almond paste for the filling.

raspberry and almond bakewell

What is frangipane made of?

  • Soft unsalted butter
  • Caster sugar
  • Medium eggs
  • Ground almonds
  • Plain flour

Adding icing sugar to bakewell slices

Please note that the below contains an affiliate link to a product I am recommending, which means if you click this link and then go on to purchase the product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

How do you make Bakewell tart?

  1. Set up the food processor and add to the mixing compartment: 125g flour, 50g ground almonds, 100g cold, cubed butter, 75g icing sugar and a pinch of salt. Pulse for a few seconds until the mixture resembles fine breadcrumbs.Ingredients in processor for making pastry

  2. whisk together 1 egg yolk, with 1 tablespoon cold water and 1tsp vanilla extract. Return to the breadcrumb mix in the processor and gradually add the egg mix whilst continuing to pulse. Add enough egg mix for the pastry to just come together.

  3. Flour your work surface then turn out the pastry and shape into a ball - then wrap in cling film and chill in the fridge.homemade sweet shortcrust pastry

  4. Place 230g soft butter and 230g caster sugar into the processor and blend for at least 5 minutes or until pale and creamy. Next whisk together the eggs and gradually add to the creamed butter and sugar whilst continuing to blend. Add the flour and ground almonds and continue to blend until smooth.making frangipane in a processor

  5. Take the pastry from the fridge, unwrap and start to carefully roll out. Try to roll the pastry to the shape of your tin. Carefully roll the pastry around the rolling pin and transfer to the tin. Roll back out and then gently shape the pastry to the base of the tin. I used a rectangular loose base fluted tin: MasterClass Non-Stick Fluted Rectangular Tart Tin / Quiche Pan With Loose Base, 36 x 13 cmpastry lining tart tin

  6. Place the raspberry jam in a bowl and mix to loosen it. Carefully spread the jam across the base of the pastry ensuring it goes all the way into the corners.Layer of jam added to the pastry

  7. Now take the frangipane filling and pour over the jam. Fill the tart tin up to about ¾ full. Scatter flaked almonds over the surface of the frangipane then place the tart in the centre of the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes.Franginpane poured over the top of the jam

How long will Bakewell tart keep?

This tart will keep well in an airtight container for up to one week.

Bakewell jam

The filling in a Bakewell tart is always jam but the type of jam can be completely of your choosing. I love this tart with raspberry jam but for something a little different why not try with fig jam or rhubarb jam.

Other traditional dessert recipes you might like:

📖 Recipe

Bakewell tart
Print

Bakewell tart

Bakewell tart with raspberry jam - with soft, almond frangipane encased in a delicate, crumbly pastry. Served best when warm out of the oven and whilst the smell of warm almonds and sticky, hot jam still lingers in the air.
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 people
Calories 514kcal

Ingredients

For the pastry:

  • 125  plain flour
  • 50  ground almonds
  • 100  unsalted butter cold
  • Pinch  of sea salt
  • 75  icing sugar
  • egg yolk
  • tsp  vanilla extract
  • tbsp  cold water

For the Frangipane

  • 230  soft unsalted butter
  • 230  caster sugar
  • medium eggs
  • 130  ground almonds
  • 45  plain flour

For the filling:

  • 300 g seedless raspberry jam
  • 100 g flaked almonds

To make the Bakewell tart:

  • Extra flour for work surfaces
  • Fresh raspberries and icing sugar to serve

Equipment

  • Food processor
  • Rolling pin
  • Loose bottom fluted tart tin (I used a rectangular one - 36 x 13 cm)

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 200 degrees C. Before you begin make sure the butter for the pastry has been in the fridge is super cold and that the butter for the frangipane is soft and at room temperature.

To make the pastry:

  • Set up the food processor and add to the mixing compartment: 125g flour, 50g ground almonds, 100g cold, cubed butter, 75g icing sugar and a pinch of salt. Pulse for a few seconds until the mixture resembles fine breadcrumbs. (don’t pulse for two long as the pastry will form best when the ingredients stay as cold as possible). 

  • In a small jug whisk together 1 egg yolk, with 1 tablespoon cold water and 1tsp vanilla extract. Return to the breadcrumb mix in the processor and gradually add the egg mix whilst continuing to pulse. Add enough egg mix for the pastry to just come together and no more - you may not need all of it. As soon as the pastry starts to come together stop adding the egg.

  • Flour your work surface then turn out the pastry and shape into a ball. Work quickly and handle as little as possible to keep the pastry cool.
  • Next wrap the pastry ball in cling film and chill in the fridge for 20 minutes.
Clean out the processor ready for the frangipane.
(Tip: working with cold or chilled ingredients helps to keep the pastry light and crumbly. Resting pastry in the fridge for at least 20 minutes helps to prevent shrinking in the oven)

To make the frangipane

  • For the frangipane the butter needs to be at room temperature. Place 230g soft butter and 230g caster sugar into the processor and blend for at least 5 minutes or until pale and creamy.
  • Next whisk together the eggs and gradually add to the creamed butter and sugar whilst continuing to blend. Add a spoonful of ground almonds every now again to help prevent the mixture from splitting.

  • Once all the egg has been combined add the remaining ground almond and all the flour. Blend for a further minute until smooth. Set to one side ready to add to the pastry case later.

To make the Bakewell tart.

  • Prepare your tin by coating the surface with butter and sprinkling over icing sugar - Tap off any excess. Ensure the oven is on and up to temp at 200 degrees C.
  • Flour the work surface and rolling pin. Take the pastry from the fridge, unwrap and start to carefully roll out.
  • Try to roll the pastry to the shape of your tin. The pastry needs to be slightly bigger so that it can be placed up the sides of the tin.
  • When rolled out to size carefully roll the pastry around the rolling pin and transfer to the tin. Roll back out and then gently shape the pastry to the base of the tin. Any cracks or holes in the pastry can be easily repaired by pushing the pastry back together or filling gaps with excess bits of pastry. However, try not to over handle.
  • Next place the raspberry jam in a bowl and mix to loosen it. Carefully spread the jam across the base of the pastry ensuring it goes all the way into the corners.
  • Now take the frangipane filling and pour over the jam. Fill the tart tin up to about ¾ full and no more. The frangipane will rise in the oven and will spill over if too much is added.
  • Scatter flaked almonds over the surface of the frangipane then place the tart in the centre of the preheated oven and bake for 30 minutes. Check at 25 minutes - the tart is done when a skewer comes out of the frangipane clean.
  • Once the Bakewell tart is cooked, leave to cool for a few minutes before removing from the tin.
  • Decorate with icing and serve with fresh raspberries.

Nutrition

Serving: 126g | Calories: 514kcal | Carbohydrates: 56.8g | Protein: 7.4g | Fat: 34.2g | Saturated Fat: 15.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 80mg | Sugar: 44.9g

The post Bakewell Tart appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/bakewell-tart/feed/ 0
Italian Chicken Cacciatore https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/#comments Sat, 04 May 2019 16:50:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1956 Italian chicken cacciatore flavoured with rosemary and olives. A really simple and healthy chicken breast one pot, with all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew. Best cooked long and slow either in the oven, slow cooker, pressure cooker, one pot or any other preferred method of slow cooking. Chicken Cacciatore Chicken cacciatore is...

Read More

The post Italian Chicken Cacciatore appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Italian chicken cacciatore flavoured with rosemary and olives. A really simple and healthy chicken breast one pot, with all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew. Best cooked long and slow either in the oven, slow cooker, pressure cooker, one pot or any other preferred method of slow cooking.

Italian chicken cacciatore

Chicken Cacciatore

Chicken cacciatore is a proper Italian classic and just like spag bol (ragu), risotto and pizza, its a dish that most British households are happy to adopt. Even in the warmer months this easy chicken cacciatore can be such a delight at the end of the day. It may be a hearty stew but the aromatic and earthy flavours of olives and rosemary means it will fit well with a herbed rice dish or some buttered new potatoes. If it does happen to be freezing outside and blowing a gale - then of course this just has to served with a huge pile of creamy mash potatoes. Either way, you're sorted with a fantastic meal.

Italian Chicken stew

Why is it called chicken cacciatore?

This simple Italian chicken stew goes back to the roots of Italy, when hunters used to make this dish with the basic ingredients they had to hand. In Italian 'cacciatore' means 'hunter' and so this dish is sometimes referred to as hunters chicken stew. Hunters style means to be prepared with onions, tomatoes, mushrooms, herbs and sometimes wine. I'm assuming the 'sometimes' means that wine was added when it was available - so, of course, in my version there is plenty of wine 🙂

What wine goes with chicken cacciatore?

As cacciatore is Italian it would be best to make with an Italian wine. My all time favourite Italian wine is Valpolicella, in particular the valpolicella amarone. Ben and I got married in this region of Italy and had this wine served at our wedding breakfast along with a fantastic amarone risotto. The Valpolicalla classico, ripasso or amarone would work well in this dish due to the robust, rich flavours. However, a full bodied montepulciano or  sangiovese would also work really well. If you don't have an Italian wine to hand then any other full bodied wine will be fine, perhaps try with a malbec or strong merlot.

Chicken stew

What is traditionally served with this dish?

Traditionally an Italian chicken casserole is served with fresh pasta - of course. Usually spaghetti, tagliatelle or fettuccine. However, as mentioned earlier, I tend to go with something that will match the time of year. As we are now heading into summer I like to make this dish with herbed rice, which is long grain and wild rice mixed with sea salt and freshly chopped parsley.

How long will it last in the fridge?

A chicken dish will last 1 to 2 days in the fridge depending on how fresh the chicken was when it was cooked. Chicken cacciatore can also be frozen in a sealed container, but it must be cooled first. Freeze for up to 3 months and thoroughly defrost before heating through until piping hot.

Italian chicken casserole

Serve

Serve this dish with your preferred side and top with fresh parsley. Enjoy!

📖 Recipe

chicken cacciatore
Print

Italian Chicken Cacciatore

Easy Chicken cacciatore, a slow cooked, Italian, red wine chicken stew. With all the ingredients of an authentic hunters style stew.
Course Dinner, evening meal, tea
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 418kcal

Ingredients

For the Chicken Stew:

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 750 g Chicken breast (4 breast)
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 200 g Shallots, peeled and left whole (20 Shallots or small onions)
  • 2 Cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 200 ml Italian full bodied red wine
  • 160 g Baby tomatoes
  • 2 tins chopped tomatoes
  • 2 tablespoon Tomato puree
  • 160 g mushrooms, roughly chopped into quarters
  • 3 Sprigs of fresh rosemary
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 1 Handful Green and black whole olives, pitted
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • 1 Handful Fresh chopped parsley to garnish

Instructions

  • If slow cooking in the oven, pre-heat the oven to 170 degrees C. Place a casserole dish on the stove top and heat up 2 tablespoon olive oil on a medium heat.
  • Slice the chicken breasts into large chunks (I cut each breast into 3), season with salt and pepper and dust evenly with 2 tablespoon plain flour. When the oil is hot; place the chicken chunks in the casserole dish and fry on each side for around 3-4 minutes, or until golden brown. The flour from the chicken will stick to the base of the dish and begin to turn brown - don't panic - leave this for the moment.
  • Remove the chicken and place in a bowl and set to one side. With the casserole dish still on a medium add the peeled whole shallots and chopped garlic. Add more olive oil if needed. Cook for a minute or so before adding the red wine. The wine should sizzle as it enters the pan and loosen the brown flour from the base. Use a wooden spoon to fully remove all the flour (deglaze).
  • Once the wine has reduced by at least half; add 160g whole baby tomatoes, 2 tins of chopped tomatoes, and 2 tablespoon tomato puree. Mix well and bring to a simmer. 
  • Once simmering add 160g chopped mushrooms, 3 springs of rosemary, 2 bay leaves and a handful of green and black pitted olives. Stir well and simmer for a further minute or so.
  • Next return the pre cooked chicken to the casserole dish and stir in well. Bring to the boil then clamp on a lid and place in the middle of the oven for 50mins - 1hr. Alternatively transfer to a slow cooker and cook on medium for 3 hours.
  • Check the stew after 50 minutes. If it appears ready then taste and season with salt and pepper. 
  • Serve the stew with herbed rice or mash or pasta

Nutrition

Serving: 629g | Calories: 418kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 50.1g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.6g | Sodium: 720mg | Sugar: 11.8g

The post Italian Chicken Cacciatore appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-chicken-cacciatore/feed/ 1
Hungarian Mushroom Soup https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/#respond Sun, 19 May 2019 07:00:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10104 Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love! What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup? Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika. The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery...

Read More

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!

hungarian soup

What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup?

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika.

The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery paprika produces a robust, earthy and flavoursome soup that is just crying out for a dollop of sour cream!

What is in Creamy Hungarian mushroom soup?

This soup uses just a few common ingredients:

  • Butter
  • Onion 
  • Mushrooms (I use closed cup and shiitake mushrooms)
  • Plain flour
  • 2 ½ tsps. paprika (I use standard paprika, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it)
  • White wine
  • Good quality vegetable stock
  • Soy sauce
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Soured cream
  • Lemon juice
  • Dried or fresh dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • Fresh parsley
  • Extra sour cream for topping

RECIPE TIP: Although the dish is titled Hungarian Mushroom Soup, it is not essential to use Hungarian paprika. Standard paprika will work fine. However, the use of authentic Hungarian paprika, which has a deep red colour and sweeter flavour, would undoubtedly produce a richer, sweeter soup.

Ingredients for hungarian mushroom soup

How to prepare Hungarian mushroom soup

  1. In a large pan, fry the onions in butter until soft, then add the mushrooms and cook for another 2 minutes.how to make hungarian soup
  2. When the mushrooms start to soften, sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.add flour and paprika to mushrooms
  3. Next, add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika stuck to the base of the pan. Then gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually, until the soup starts to boil and thicken.add soy sauce to the soup
  4. Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the sour cream, then stir in well. (IMPORTANT NOTEadding the sour cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle!)add sour cream
  5. Add the lemon juice, dill, and seasoning to taste.add lemon juice and dill
  6. Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra dollops of sour cream.season and serve with fresh parsley

Can you freeze this soup?

Yes, Hungarian mushroom soup can be frozen. Allow to fully cool before transferring to an airtight container. Freeze for up to 3 months and defrost thoroughly before reheating. Reheat in a pan and ensure the soup is piping hot throughout before serving.

STORING TIP: Freshly made soup will also keep in the fridge, in a sealed container, for 2 days.

mushroom soup

What to Serve with this recipe?

An indulgent dish like this definitely requires an indulgent pairing and something that you can dunk into all that creamy, mushroomy goodness!

Without a doubt, this soup pairs well with fully loaded sandwiches. Any kind of grilled cheese will work well, and in particular, a Mushroom grilled cheese sandwich would pair up amazingly. You could also try this soup with Paprika chicken wraps or a fully loaded Beef brisket burrito!

mushroom soup with paprika and soured cream

Grab yourself a massive bowl and get ready for a delicious creamy and simple soup recipe like you’ve never tasted before! Enjoy!

Other soups you might like:

📖 Recipe

hungarian mushroom soup
Print

Hungarian Mushroom Soup

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine hungarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 214.5kcal

Ingredients

  • 30 g butter
  • 150 g Onion finely chopped
  • 500 g mushrooms I used closed cup and shiitake
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 2 ½ teaspoon paprika I used standard, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 300 ml good quality vegetable stock
  • 3 tablespoon light soy sauce
  • 200 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 3 tablespoon soured cream
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • 3 teaspoon dried dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • 20 g chopped parsley
  • Extra soured cream for topping

Instructions

  • In a large pan melt the butter and fry the onions until soft. Next add the mushrooms and stir fry for a further 2 minutes.
  • When the mushrooms start to soften sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.
  • Next add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika that are stuck to the base of the pan. Once the wine has reduced by half, gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually until the soup starts to boil and thicken.
  • Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the soured cream then stir in well. (Note - adding the soured cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle).
  • Finally, stir in the dill and lemon juice and season to taste.
  • Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra blobs of soured cream.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 363g | Calories: 214.5kcal | Carbohydrates: 17.9g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11.9g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.6g | Sodium: 880mg | Sugar: 9.9g

I first shared this Hungarian Mushroom Soup recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/feed/ 0
Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/ https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/#respond Tue, 21 May 2019 23:22:43 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10217 FEATURED AD FOR THE FISH SOCIETY. Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's...

Read More

The post Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
FEATURED AD FOR THE FISH SOCIETY. Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's Wharf.

Clam chowder recipe

Please note that this post contains affiliate links to a product I am recommending on the Fish Society website, which means if you click a link and then go on to purchase a product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

Clam Chowder Recipe

There are a handful of recipes that have stayed with me since travelling around the world in 2012. Clam chowder in a sourdough bread bowl from Fishermans Wharf in San Francisco is one of these.

Boudin Clam Chowder in sourdough bread bowl

Surely, the most luxurious soup there is. Its rich and creamy, and chocker full of potatoes and fresh clams. There are, of course, a couple of other stand out dishes from our travels; mainly, Thai green curry and Thai red curry, and of course not forgetting the incredible Amarone risotto we had for our wedding breakfast starter in Italy. But, none of these were served to us in a freshly baked sourdough bread bowl or made with clams that had been in the sea just a few hours earlier. So clearly, this dish is a winner in many respects.

Fishermans wharf San Fransisco

How many types of Clam chowder are there?

There are two types of clam chowder. The clam chowder we had in San Francisco is known as a New England clam chowder or Boston clam chowder. Typically the New England clam chowder is white, creamy and made with potatoes. The other type is the Manhattan clam chowder which, is red and made with tomatoes - a recipe for another time perhaps.

one pan clam chowder

What is clam chowder made of?

This clam chowder recipe is a mixture of onions, potatoes, bacon, white wine, milk, herbs and cream. The main ingredient is of course clams! I've used white whole-shell meretrix clams, very kindly provided by the lovely people over at The Fish Society.

Who are The Fish Society?

The fish society is an online fish monger, supplying the whole of the UK and beyond, into Europe and even the US. Fish lands in the UK fishing ports and is auctioned on day one and on day two its frozen by The Fish Society, ready to be shipped out to customers. Their products are frozen soon after being caught which, maintains the freshness of the fish and ensures that they can supply the widest possible variety.

Living in a small town, nowhere near to the sea, good quality and wide varieties of fish can be hard to come by. So I absolutely love the idea of a online fish monger delivering quality, frozen fish to my front door. Especially when it means I can get hold of a bag full of clams for under a tenner or even order a bit of lobster if it takes my fancy!!

Clam Chowder Ingredients

To make clam chowder you will need a few basic ingredients:

  • 1kg frozen whole shell clams
  • Chopped smoked bacon
  • Butter
  • Onion
  • Garlic clove
  • Potatoes
  • Flour
  • White wine
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Bay leaves
  • Sprigs of fresh thyme
  • Cream
  • Fresh parsley
  • Sourdough bread to serve

clam chowder and sourdough

How do you make homemade clam chowder?

  1. If using pre cooked frozen meretrix clams from The Fish Society, remove these from the freezer at least 6 hours before preparing the dish and leave on the side to fully defrost. If using canned clams or fresh clams no preparation is required.
  2. Pan fry 50g chopped smoked bacon until golden. Remove half of the bacon and set to one side for a topping later on.fry bacon until golden
  3. With the remaining bacon still in the pan add 50g butter and melt. Then add 1 chopped onion and 1 clove of minced garlic. Pan fry on medium until soft then add 300g of cubed potatoes and continue to stir fry for another 5 minutes.add butter onions and potatoes
  4. Next add 2 tablespoon of plain flour to the onion and potato mix, which will help to thicken the chowder along with the starch from the potatoes. Stir in and then add the wine. Use the wine to deglaze the pan (scrape bits off the bottom). When the wine has reduced by half start to gradually add the milk, whilst continually stirring.add white wine and gradually add milk
  5. Once all the milk has been added bring the chowder to the boil then place on the lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are cooked.
  6. If using fresh raw clams cook these now until the shells open. Discard any unopened shells. Remove cooked clams from their shells and save a few shells for decoration later.
  7. If using canned clams or the pre cooked, frozen meretrix clams then theres no need to cook these. Just remove the shells from the defrosted meretrix clams and save a few shells to use as decoration later.
  8. Once the potatoes are soft add the cooked clams to the chowder. Bring the chowder back to a simmer and cook for a couple of minutes to ensure the clams are fully heated through.remove cooked clams from their shells and add to the chowder
  9. Take the chowder off the heat and allow to cool for a couple of minute before stirring in the cream. IMPORTANT TIP: don't add the cream whilst the chowder is still on the heat as this will cause the cream to curdle.take off heat and stir in the cream
  10. Add any saved shells for decoration and then top with bacon and freshly chopped parsley. Serve with sourdough bread.add in shells for decoration then top with bacon and fresh parsley

What can I eat with clam chowder?

If you are going to eat anything with clam chowder I highly recommend the traditional sourdough. Either large pieces to dunk or if you're feeling adventurous, hollow out a loaf of sourdough and use this as your bowl. A wonderful tradition created by the Boudin bakery, which can be found at the start of Fisherman's Wharf, San Francisco.

Clam chowder in sourdough bowl at boudin

How do you store this recipe?

Once the clam chowder is fully cooled transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. To reheat transfer to a large pan and slowly heat on the stove. Stir continually and cook until the chowder is just about simmering to prevent the cream from curdling. If you've used fresh or canned clams you can freeze the chowder for up to 3 months. Thoroughly defrost before reheating as above. If using frozen clams you should only refrigerate the chowder - do not freeze.

Clam chowder with frozen clams

For more fishy inspiration check out The Fish Society website. Enjoy the chowder! - And if you haven't already, and you happen to be in the area, definitely check out clam chowder at Boudins Bakery in San Fran!

debbie and ben in san fransisco

Love creamy chowder? Why not try this creamy Hungarian mushroom soup or this Creamy mushroom pasta.

Other Fish Recipes

📖 Recipe

Print

Clam Chowder

Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's Wharf.
Course Appetizer, fish, main meal, Soup, starter, starter or main
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 445.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 kg frozen whole shell clams alternatively use fresh or canned
  • 125 g Chopped smoked bacon
  • 50 g Butter
  • 160 g Onion
  • 1 Garlic clove
  • 300 g Potatoes peeled and cubed
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 100 ml White wine
  • 200 ml Semi skimmed milk
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 3 Sprigs of fresh thyme
  • Water - add until happy with consistency
  • 100 ml Cream
  • 20 g Fresh parsley
  • Sourdough bread to serve

Instructions

  • If using pre cooked frozen meretrix clams from The Fish Society, remove these from the freezer at least 6 hours before preparing the dish and leave on the side to fully defrost. If using canned clams or fresh clams no preparation is required.
  • Pan fry 50g chopped smoked bacon until golden. Remove half of the bacon and set to one side for a topping later on.
    fry bacon until golden
  • With the remaining bacon still in the pan add 50g butter and melt. Then add 1 chopped onion and 1 clove of minced garlic. Pan fry on medium until soft then add 300g of cubed potatoes and continue to stir fry for another 5 minutes.
    add butter onions and potatoes
  • Next add 2 tablespoon of plain flour to the onion and potato mix, which will help to thicken the chowder along with the starch from the potatoes. Stir in and then add the wine. Use the wine to deglaze the pan (scrape bits off the bottom). When the wine has reduced by half start to gradually add the milk, whilst continually stirring.
    add white wine and gradually add milk
  • Once all the milk has gone into the pan, add the bay leaves and sprigs of thyme. Check consistency and add 100-200ml of water if the soup appears too thick.
    add bay and thyme and season
  • Bring the chowder to the boil then place on the lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are cooked.
  • If using fresh raw clams now is the time to get these into boiling water and cook until the shells open. Discard any unopened shells. Remove cooked clams from their shells and save a few shells for decoration later.
  • If using canned clams or the pre cooked, frozen meretrix clams then theres no need to cook these. Just remove the shells from the defrosted meretrix clams and save a few shells to use as decoration later.
  • Once the potatoes are soft add the cooked clams to the chowder. Check consistency again and add water if required. Bring the chowder back to a simmer and cook for a couple of minutes to ensure the clams are fully heated through.
    remove cooked clams from their shells and add to the chowder
  • Take the chowder off the heat and allow to cool for a couple of minute before stirring in the cream.
    take off heat and stir in the cream

IMPORTANT TIP:

  • don't add the cream whilst the chowder is still on the heat as this will cause the cream to curdle.

Serve:

  • Add any saved shells for decoration and then top with bacon and freshly chopped parsley. Serve with sourdough bread.
    add in shells for decoration then top with bacon and fresh parsley

Recipe tip:

  • If you are using frozen, cooked clams and you don't have time to defrost them you can add the frozen clams in their shells directly to the chowder. This of course means that all clams will be in shells when you serve the dish. - And although this looks pretty it makes eating this recipe a little more time consuming. You will also need a bigger pan and the clams should be simmered for longer to ensure they are fully reheated.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 338g | Calories: 445.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 30.7g | Saturated Fat: 17.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8.6g | Sodium: 600mg | Sugar: 7.2g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy clam chowder; New England style. Made with frozen meretrix clams, smoked bacon and a creamy white wine sauce

The post Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/feed/ 0
Chicken Noodle Soup https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/#respond Fri, 12 Nov 2021 14:17:56 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10082 Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite! 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Chicken noodle soup is a great recipe for using up...

Read More

The post Chicken Noodle Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite!

A large pan of chicken noodle soup with chopped vegetables and fresh parsley.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Chicken noodle soup is a great recipe for using up the week’s leftovers. Not only is this soup recipe full of vegetables its also perfect for using the more budget-friendly cuts of chicken, like chicken legs and thighs.

The recipe below uses three large chicken thighs with the skins on, and chopped up onion, carrot and celery. Cooked up in large pan, these ingredients combine to create a full flavoured broth, perfect for holding noodles.

🥘 Ingredients

To make chicken noodle soup you will need:

  • Skin on chicken thighs
  • Oil and dried rosemary
  • Minced garlic
  • Onion chopped
  • Carrot chopped
  • Celery chopped
  • Stock cube in water or retail pre-made stock
  • Bay leaves
  • Dried medium egg noodles
  • Salt and pepper
  • Fresh parsley

Ingredient notes

Chicken: Any cut of chicken will work well in this recipe from leftover Sunday dinner chicken to freshly cut chicken breast. If you are using cooked leftover chicken, this can just be added at the end.

Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.

Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of soup.

Noodles: Medium noodles are a good option for this recipe as they hold together well in the soup.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pan fry the chicken thighs in oil and rosemary until skin is browned, then remove the thighs from the pan and set to one side. 
  2. In the same pan add the minced garlic, chopped onion, carrot and celery and fry until soft.
  3. Add the stock to the vegetables and bring to a simmer. When simmering return the thighs to the pan along with 2 bay leaves, pop on the lid and cook for 20 minutes.
  4. After 20 minutes, remove the thighs from the pan. Add the dried noodles to the broth and simmer until noodles are cooked through. Separate the chicken meat from the skin and bones and then shred the meat. Skin and bones can be discarded.Four images showing how to make chicken noodle soup for steps 1-4.
  5. Once the noodles are cooked stir in the cooked shredded chicken and season to taste.
  6. Top with fresh parsley and serve.add noodles

💭 Expert tips

  • If using pre cooked leftover or rotisserie chicken; skip step 1 and instead of adding the thighs in step 3 just move to adding the noodles. Shred your cooked chicken and add at the end.
  • The stock can reduce down quite quickly, so have extra hot water available to top up the soup as it cooks.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does chicken soup help clear colds?

Some studies, like this study from the American College of CHEST Physicians, show that chicken noodle soup can help clear nasal passageways, which is helpful when you have a cold. This is thought to be due to the heat, the aroma, and the taste.
This recipe is also generally high in protein, vitamins and minerals, and so provides a well-balanced meal promoting general wellness.

Is this soup gluten free?

Egg noodles and some brands of stock can contain gluten. For a gluten free recipe replace the noodles with rice noodles and use a gluten free stock.

How to store?

Completely cool then store in air tight container in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months. Noodles tend to not freeze and reheat well. So if you plan to freeze this recipe, leave out the noodles. Instead, add the noodles in when you have defrosted and are reheating the soup. Defrost thoroughly and reheat in a pan until piping hot.

Leftover shredded chicken with noodles and chicken broth soup.

🍵 Other soup recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

chicken noodle soup
Print

Chicken Noodle Soup

Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 520kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 500 g Skin on chicken thighs or chicken breasts, leftover chicken or rotisserie
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 3 cloves minced garlic
  • 120 g chopped onion 1 medium onion
  • 150 g chopped carrot 2 medium carrots
  • 150 g chopped celery 4 sticks
  • 500 ml chicken stock
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 180 g dried medium egg noodles
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • 4 tablespoon Fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Pan fry the chicken thighs in oil and rosemary until skin is browned, then remove the thighs from the pan and set to one side.
    500 g Skin on chicken thighs, 1 tablespoon oil, ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • In the same pan add the minced garlic, chopped onion, carrot and celery and fry until soft.
    3 cloves minced garlic, 120 g chopped onion, 150 g chopped carrot, 150 g chopped celery
  • Add the stock to the vegetables and bring to a simmer. When simmering return the thighs to the pan along with 2 bay leaves, pop on the lid and cook for 20 minutes.
    500 ml chicken stock, 2 Bay leaves
  • After 20 minutes, remove the thighs from the pan. Add the dried noodles to the broth and simmer until noodles are cooked through. Separate the chicken meat from the skin and bones and then shred the meat. Skin and bones can be discarded.
    180 g dried medium egg noodles
  • Once the noodles are cooked stir in the cooked shredded chicken and season to taste.
    Salt and pepper to taste
  • Top with fresh parsley and serve.
    4 tablespoon Fresh parsley

Video

Notes

Chicken: Any cut of chicken will work well in this recipe from leftover Sunday dinner chicken to freshly cut chicken breast. If using pre cooked leftover or rotisserie chicken; skip step 1 and instead of adding the thighs in step 3 just move to adding the noodles. Shred your cooked chicken and add at the end.
Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.
Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of soup. The stock can reduce down quite quickly, so have extra hot water available to top up the soup as it cooks.
Noodles: Medium noodles are a good option for this recipe as they hold together well in the soup.
Does chicken soup help clear colds? Some studies show that chicken noodle soup can help clear nasal passageways, which is helpful when you have a cold. This is thought to be due to the heat, the aroma, and the taste.
This recipe is also generally high in protein, vitamins and minerals, and so provides a well-balanced meal promoting general wellness.
Is this soup gluten free? Egg noodles and some brands of stock can contain gluten. For a gluten free recipe replace the noodles with rice noodles and use a gluten free stock.
How to store? Completely cool then store in air tight container in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months. Noodles tend to not freeze and reheat well. So if you plan to freeze this recipe, leave out the noodles. Instead, add the noodles in when you have defrosted and are reheating the soup. Defrost thoroughly and reheat in a pan until piping hot.

Nutrition

Serving: 476g | Calories: 520kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 378mg | Potassium: 752mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 6889IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jul 2019. Updated in Nov 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

I first shared Chicken Noodle Soup on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Chicken Noodle Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/feed/ 0
Green Bean Almondine https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/ https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/#respond Thu, 22 Aug 2019 12:21:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10523 Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy...

Read More

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy green beans with almonds.

Green bean almondine

What is green bean almondine?

This recipe is a classic french dish and is simply green beans with almonds. The name has been adapted from the original French term of ‘amandine’ meaning 'a garnish of almonds’.

As nice and simple as all that sounds, in order to make this the best green bean recipe, there are a few extra additions that can really bring it to life. This mainly involves pan frying the almonds in butter and lemon juice. The lemon juice reduces into the butter and creates a sweet caramelised sauce. So delicious!

My own twist, which I really feel does make this the best green been almondine recipe ever, is the addition of freshly chopped dill. The subtle flavour of this unobtrusive herb partners so well with the sour lemon and creamy almonds.

green bean almondine with almond garnish

Green Bean Almondine Ingredients

To make this recipe you will need just 5 ingredients, plus a bit of seasoning. Keep in mind, fresh green beans are best for this recipe. They’re easy to prepare and deliciously crisp.

  • 200g Green Beans
  • 50g Butter
  • 50g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill
  • salt and pepper

Green bean almondine in the pan

How to prepare the green beans

Preparing green beans is not a difficult task at all. Plus, fresh green beans are well worth it for their crisp texture and flavour. Follow these guidelines and you’ll be cooking fresh green beans for your green bean almondine in no time!

  1. How to trim green beans

    Trimming green beans needn’t be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay – no trimming required.

    • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side.
    • Use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.
  2. How to clean green beans

As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

This green bean recipe is one of the easiest you’ll find. It takes just a few steps and is well worth the end result.

  1. The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.add water to green beans and simmer
  2. After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  3. Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.add flaked almond to butter
  4. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  5. Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds.add blanched green beans into the butter and almond mix
  6. Stir in some fresh dill and season. Then serve immediately.add fresh dill

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.

The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.

When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

green bean almondine side dish

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a simple roast chicken, a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

For dessert, depending on the time of year, try this delicious Bakewell tart with raspberry jam, apple dump cake with fresh apples. pumpkin cobbler with spiced butter toffee, healthy banana bread with week old bananas, strawberry rhubarb crisp, or peach cobbler with cake mix.

Green bean almondine with buttery almonds

So next time you’re stuck for ideas on what to serve with dinner, why not give this fabulous side dish a try.

 Recipe low in carbshigh in nutrients recipegluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

green bean almondine
Print

Green bean almondine

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens - this surly must be it!
Course Appetizer, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine French
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 182.6kcal

Ingredients

  • 200 g Green Beans
  • 50 g Butter
  • 50 g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill (Handful)
  • salt and pepper

Instructions

How to trim green beans

  • Trimming green beans needn't be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay - no trimming required.
  • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side, use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.

How to clean green beans

  • As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

  • The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.
    add water to green beans and simmer
  • After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.
    place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  • Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.
    add flaked almond to butter
  • Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.
    squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  • Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds. Stir in some fresh dill, season, and then serve immediately.
    add fresh dill

Video

Notes

Click here to see traffic light nutritional info for this recipe

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.
The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.
When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

Nutrition

Serving: 82g | Calories: 182.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 2.6g | Protein: 3.9g | Fat: 17.5g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.4g | Sodium: 200mg | Fiber: 1.7g | Sugar: 1.8g

This recipe was inspired by a recipe from Family Foodie. I first shared this Green bean almondine recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

PIN FOR LATER

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens – this surely must be it!

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/feed/ 0
Cauliflower soup https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/#respond Fri, 15 Nov 2019 14:40:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11419 Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just...

Read More

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.

Cauliflower soup recipe

Can you make this recipe without cream?

Although most soups will benefit tremendously from a big dollop of cream, cauliflower soup is one of those recipes that can manage a velvety, creamy finish all on its own. Admittedly, there is some semi skimmed that goes into this soup recipe, but the rest of that delicious, creaminess is from the cauliflower itself. Give it 20 minutes to simmer in some stock, or 15 minutes to roast in the oven and the soft, fluffy florets will blitz down into an irresistibly, creamy soup in a matter of seconds.

 

Whether you use roasted cauliflower of cauliflower boiled in veggie stock, the results will always be the same - full flavoured and velvety smooth. However, see the end of this post if you are looking to make a cream of cauliflower soup recipe.

healthy cauliflower soup recipe

Ingredients for cauliflower soup

This easy soup recipe requires just a few simple ingredients, many of which I already had at home:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots (or 6 small) (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower (600g) leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450ml vegetable stock
  • 300ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning
easy cauliflower soup

How to make cauliflower soup

  1. Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  2. Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelisedfrying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  3. Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.adding cauliflower florets to the fried shallots
  4. Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk. adding stock to the pan adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  5. Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft. soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  6. Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
  7. Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend.
  8. Add more liquid to thin out and reach your desired consistency. cooked soup transferred to a food processor soup blended until smooth
  9. Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
  10. Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.soup served and seasoned
  11. Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Different types of cauliflower soup

This recipe is the most basic of soup recipes and is pretty damn good just as it is. However, cauliflower is a versatile vegetable and so if you're looking for a soup with a bit more punch, why not try one of the options below:

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make this soup spicy

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander.

Curried soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

Roasted cauliflower gives this soup and extra layer of smokey, nutty flavours, which is especially good combined with the melted cheese or curry spices from the above ideas. Simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

Roasted cauliflower is also fantastic in a roasted cauliflower salad.

creamy cauliflower soup

How to make this recipe super creamy

This recipe is one thats creamy all on its own. The mild flavour and soft texture of the cauliflower means that a quick blitz in the blender will give a lusciously creamy result every time. However, if you are looking for extra creaminess or even wanting to call your soup 'cream of cauliflower' then you may want to add in a little cream.

To make this soup a cream of cauliflower recipe simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Cauliflower soup without cream

Can you freeze this recipe?

This soup recipe can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.

Other homemade soup recipes to try:

📖 Recipe

cauliflower soup
Print

Cauliflower Soup

Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.
Course Appetizer, starter or main
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 114.7kcal

Equipment

  • Large saucepan
  • Food processor or hand blender

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots or 6 small (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower 600g leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450 ml vegetable stock
  • 300 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning and crusty bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  • Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelised
    frying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  • Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.
    adding ground nutmeg to the soup pan
  • Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk.
    adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  • Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft.
    soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  • Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
    cooked soup transferred to a food processor
  • Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend. Add more liquid to thin out the soup and stop when you reach your desired consistency.
    soup blended until smooth
  • Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
    soup served and seasoned
  • Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.
  • Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Video

Notes

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make spicy cauliflower soup

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander. Curried cauliflower soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

To make roasted cauliflower soup, simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

How to make cauliflower soup creamy

To make cream of cauliflower soup simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Can you freeze cauliflower soup?

Cauliflower soup can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.
Nutritional info cauliflower soup

Nutrition

Serving: 378g | Calories: 114.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 11.7g | Protein: 9.6g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.5g | Sodium: 280mg | Fiber: 3.2g | Sugar: 9.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy cauliflower soup recipe

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/feed/ 0
Italian Style Slow Cooker Ragu https://properfoodie.com/italian-style-slow-cooker-ragu/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-style-slow-cooker-ragu/#comments Sun, 12 Mar 2017 18:29:53 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3711 Finally I've got around to posting my slow cooker Ragu recipe. I love a rich, tomatoey, Italian style Ragu, served with tagliatelle, fresh basil and a good helping of parmesan - you just can't beat it! As a child, spag bol was always my most favourite meal. Any time I was asked what I wanted to eat, be...

Read More

The post Italian Style Slow Cooker Ragu appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Finally I've got around to posting my slow cooker Ragu recipe. I love a rich, tomatoey, Italian style Ragu, served with tagliatelle, fresh basil and a good helping of parmesan - you just can't beat it!

crockpot ragu

As a child, spag bol was always my most favourite meal. Any time I was asked what I wanted to eat, be that at home or out in a restaurant, the answer would undoubtedly be spaghetti bolognaise. Although there was no beating my mothers bolognaise.

Over the years, my own version of spag bol has of course been hugely influence by my mums recipe. However, with many trips to Italy now under my belt and a few cookery classes taken along the way. My approach to a bolognaise has definitely changed and I now incorporate alot more of the traditional Italian methods.

(If you're interested in making your own pasta from scratch have a look at my pasta guide and video.)

Bolognaise or Ragu, that is the question!

So the first thing to mention about this recipe is that its not strictly a Bolognaise. It is actually a Ragu. Although, the British take on a Bolognaise is always the same and is generally mince meat in a tomato sauce. But any Italian will tell you that if the sauce contains tomatoes then the dish is most definitely a Ragu. The traditional Italian Bolognaise contains no tomatoes but is made with stock instead. So thats that.

ragu ingredients

The Ragu recipe

I like to have plenty going on in my slow cooker Ragu, so as well as a couple of good quality tinned tomatoes, I like to add celery, carrots and mushrooms. When Ben and I visit Bologna in Northern Italy, we attended a cookery day at CIBO cookery school, where I learnt how to make a proper Italian Bolognaise and Ragu. Both recipes included finely chopping the carrots, celery and onion. All had to be chopped into tiny cubes, which were roughly the same size in order to promote even cooking.

cooking at CIBO cookery school in Bologna

So now, my Ragu is one big mix of what my mum always made and the traditional Italian recipe.

ragu tagliatelle

And  I really rather like it.

Ragu in the slow cooker

This last week I've been using my slow cooker every day. This was part of my 6 week reboot challenge, which you can read more about here. Last week was week 2 of the reboot and my challenge for the week was to try out the slow cooker and use it every day for our evening meals. You can read about how I got on here. The up shot of this was that I made a lot of amazing food and so I'm really excited to share all of these new recipes. The slow cooker Ragu was the first recipe that got made at the start of the week and it was a massive hit.

So the below recipe is for a slow cooker, but if you don't have a slow cooker it should work out just as good if you pop it in a low oven in an casserole dish. If youre after a ragu with a twist have a look at my salami and pork ragu.

Of course this recipe is best served with homemade fresh tagliatelle. But for convenience, shop bought pasta does the job just fine.

Nutritional information for this recipe>>

**Estimated nutritional information per serving and per 100g of Ragu without pasta or toppings. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

📖 Recipe

Print

Italian Style Slow Cooker Ragu

A lusciously, rich, tomatoey Ragu, prepared over several hours in the slow cooker. Served with a mound of tagliatelle, fresh basil and parmesan
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Calories 257kcal

Ingredients

  • 750 g lean mince beef
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • 2 medium onions 250g finely chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried marjoram
  • 1 teaspoon dried basil
  • 250 ml of full bodied Italian red wine
  • 3 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 star anise
  • 3 celery sticks 150g finely chopped
  • 3 small carrots 130g finely chopped
  • 175 g chestnut mushrooms quartered
  • 2 tins of good quality plum tomatoes San Marzano tomatoes, if available

Extras:

  • Fresh basil
  • Parmesan
  • Tagliatelle or preferred pasta

Instructions

  • If using a sear and stew slow cooker, use the dish from the slow cook to prepare the first part of this recipe. If your slow cooker doesn't have the option to be used on the hob or if you aren't using a slow cooker, then use a large pan or wok.
  • Place your large pan or slower cooker dish on a medium heat on the hob. Season the mince with salt and pepper then gently brown off in the pre-heated pan. Add the onion, garlic, marjoram and basil to the meat, mix well and cook for a further minute.
  • Take the pan off the heat and add the wine, tomato puree, bay leaves, and star anise, then mix well. Finally, add the vegetables and tinned tomatoes and mix again. If you can, roughly chop the plum tomatoes in half or into 3 using your mixing spoon. This releases the juices into the sauce and also creates more manageable chunks of tomato.
  • If using a sear and stew slow cooker, you can now place the dish and its contents back into the slow cooker and pop on the lid. Set to medium and leave to cook for 4-6 hours. If you want a longer cooking time, set the slow cooker to low and cook for 8-10 hours.
  • Alternatively, transfer your Ragu to your slow cooker or to an oven proof casserole dish with lid. If using a casserole dish; pre-heat your oven to 150 degrees and cook for 3-4 hours. Check and stir after 2 hours - alter oven temp if you feel necessary, before returning to the oven to cook for the remaining time.
  • After the required cooking time is up, check your Ragu and taste. Season if required. If the consistency appears to thin, turn your slow cooker to high and cook for a further 20-30 minutes with the lid off.
  • Serve with tagliatelle and top with fresh basil leaves and grated parmesan. Enjoy!

Nutrition

Serving: 430g | Calories: 257kcal | Fat: 5.8g

The post Italian Style Slow Cooker Ragu appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-style-slow-cooker-ragu/feed/ 14
Yorkshire Parkin Recipe https://properfoodie.com/parkin-for-bonfire-night/ https://properfoodie.com/parkin-for-bonfire-night/#comments Mon, 12 Oct 2020 23:35:27 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5163 Yorkshire Parkin is an age old ginger cake recipe from Northern England. It's moist, sticky and full of wholesome oats; perfect for Autumn and Bonfire night! It takes just 15 minutes to whip together (no machine required), then sit back as it slowly bakes in the oven and fills the house with a delightful, treacle...

Read More

The post Yorkshire Parkin Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Yorkshire Parkin is an age old ginger cake recipe from Northern England. It's moist, sticky and full of wholesome oats; perfect for Autumn and Bonfire night! It takes just 15 minutes to whip together (no machine required), then sit back as it slowly bakes in the oven and fills the house with a delightful, treacle aroma.

Yorkshire parkin sliced up and presented piled on top of one another in a loaf tin.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Traditionally made with wholesome oatmeal and plenty of sticky black treacle, this is the best kind of ginger cake for cold and frosty nights. Great on its own but extra special when served warm and with custard.

This parkin recipe is one that has been tried and tested again and again. Originally adapted from my Grandmas recipe and then tweaked over the years to get it perfectly moist and crumbly. This rich textured and full flavoured parkin is the only cake recipe I want to be making and eating at the start of November.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a 9x9 inch tin (about 16 pieces) of this Yorkshire parkin recipe you will need:

Ingredients for Parkin recipe: self raising flour, unsalted butter, fine oats, semi skimmed milk, golden syrup, black treacle, ground ginger, salt, large egg, muscovado sugar

Ingredient notes

Self Raising flour: This recipe uses UK self raising flour, which is different to the USA version. If you don't have this type of flour, it can be substituted for: 250g (2 cups) of all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder. For more info see this article on how to make self raising flour.

Fine oats or Oatmeal: Oatmeal is finely sliced oats, which have a fine texture. This helps to produce the perfect chewy texture that parkin is so well known for. The best option for parkin is medium oatmeal. However, if you don't have access to oatmeal you can use normal oats but try to opt for rolled oats or fine porridge oats. If you only have whole oats you could blitz these in a food processor in order to break them up before adding to the recipe.

Muscovado sugar: Muscovado sugar is a coarse, unrefined, dark brown sugar. It contains natural molasses and has a toffee-like taste. The next best alternative is dark brown sugar. However, this is finer, has less molasses and a milder taste.

Golden syrup: Again, I believe this is a UK based product and is best not substituted if it can be helped. Golden syrup is thick and smooth with a golden colour. It has a unique sweet, caramel, buttery taste. If you can't find it in your local store you can easily make your own golden syrup.

Black treacle: Again, a UK product but it can be swapped for dark molasses.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pre heat the oven to 140°C (275°F) and line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper.
  2. In a large mixing bowl stir together the flour, salt, ginger and oats.
  3. Melt the muscovado sugar, butter, treacle, and golden syrup over a low heat in a small pan.
  4. Pour the melted mixture into the flour mixture.4 images showing step by step instructions. 1. line tin, 2. mix dry ingredients, 3. melt butter, sugar, syrup and treacle in pan, 4. pour melted mix into dry mix
  5. Gently stir the melted ingredients into the dry mixture until completely combined.
  6. In a small jug whisk together the milk and egg and gradually add to the cake mixture.
  7. Carefully transfer the mixture to the lined tin and smooth evenly with a wooden spoon.
  8. Place in the centre of a preheated oven and bake for 1 hour or until a skewer comes out clean. Remove from the oven and leave in the tin to cool, then transfer to a wire rack before slicing into 16 square pieces.4 images showing step by step instructions. 5. mix wet and dry ingredients, 6, whisk milk and egg and gradually add to cake mix, 7. pour cake mix into tin and smooth evenly, 8. Bake for 1 hour then cool and place on a rack.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How should parkin be stored?

Once made this lovely Yorkshire Parkin can be wrapped in cling film and stored in an air tight container for a good few weeks. The high amount of sugar means that it keeps really well and actually improves with age. - A bit like a Christmas cake.

Can this cake be frozen?

Once baked this cake can be frozen as a whole or sliced up and frozen as separate pieces. Wrap the whole thing or individual pieces in a double layer of cling film then freeze for up to 3 months.

To defrost leave on the side for a couple of hours - this will take more or less time to defrost depend on the size. Alternatively microwave in 30 second bursts until defrosted and slightly warmed through.

Why has my parkin sunk?

Not baking parkin for long enough can mean the gooey mixture inside will cause the cake to collapse/sink as it cools. However, leaving it for longer can make the parkin too dry. The best advice is to check with a skewer 10 minutes before the end baking. Then make a judgement based on how clean the skewer is.

What is the difference between parkin and ginger cake?

Yorkshire parkin uses oatmeal and plenty of black treacle. Lancashire parkin, although still northern and still parkin, skips out the treacle and uses just golden syrup. Gingerbread or ginger cake also uses golden syrup and of course ginger, but has no treacle and no oats or oatmeal.

In my opinion parkin isn't parkin without fine oats for that chewy texture and a good amount of black treacle, which makes the cake warming and moist and also gives it a super strong and slightly bitter flavour thats almost like liquorish.

Full slab of parkin on a chopping board being sliced with a knife into 16 equal square pieces.

🍰 Other Autumn baking recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Yorkshire parkin sliced up and presented piled on top of one another in a loaf tin.
Print

Yorkshire Parkin Recipe

Yorkshire Parkin is an age old ginger cake recipe from Northern England. It’s moist, sticky and full of wholesome oats; perfect for Autumn and Bonfire night! It takes just 15 minutes to whip together (no machine required), then sit back as it slowly bakes in the oven and fills the house with a delightful, treacle aroma.
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine British
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 16 pieces
Calories 276kcal

Equipment

  • 9x9 square baking tin
  • Greaseproof paper
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small saucepan
  • Measuring jug
  • Wooden spoon

Ingredients

  • 250 g Self-raising flour
  • 2 teaspoon Ground Ginger
  • Pinch of Salt
  • 250 g Fine oats or medium oatmeal
  • 120 g Light brown muscovado sugar
  • 150 g Unsalted Butter
  • 200 g Black Treacle (or dark molasses)
  • 100 g Golden Syrup
  • 150 ml Semi Skimmed Milk
  • 1 large egg

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 140°C (275°F).
  • Line a 9x9 inch square tin with greaseproof paper.
  • Sieve 250g self raising flour into a large mixing bowl. Add a pinch of salt, 2 teaspoon ground ginger and 250g fine oats/oatmeal then mix together with a wooden spoon.
  • Next place 120g muscovado sugar, 150g butter, 200g black treacle, and 100g golden syrup into a small sauce pan. Put the pan over a low heat and melt, whilst stirring well. Once fully melted, carefully pour into the flour mixture and stir together. The mixture will appear quite thick.
  • Whisk together the milk and egg. Then gradually add the milk mix to the cake mixture, stirring well between each addition. The mixture should now loosen up.
  • Once all the milk is added transfer the cake mix to the lined tin. Spread evenly across the base of the tin.
  • Place the tin in the centre of the oven and cook for an hour or until a skewer comes out clean.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven. Leave the parkin to cool completely before removing from the tin. This will ensure your parkin stays in one piece. Then transfer to a wire rack before slicing into 16 square pieces.

Notes

Substitutions:
  • The flour in this recipe can be replaced with 250g (2 cups) all purpose flour + 1 level teaspoon of baking powder.
  • Fine oats or medium oatmeal can be swapped for rolled oats or fine porridge oats. Or blitz whole oats in a food processor before adding to the recipe.
  • Replace muscovado sugar with dark brown sugar (Note that dark brown sugar is finer, has less molasses and a milder taste).
  • If you can’t get hold of UK golden syrup, have a go making your own.
  • Black treacle can be replaced with dark molasses.
 
Freezing and reheating: Wrap individual pieces or the whole slab of Parkin in a double layer of cling film and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side for a couple of hours - this will take more or less time to defrost depend on the size. Alternatively microwave in 30 second bursts until defrosted and slightly warmed through.
Sinking parkin: Not baking parkin for long enough can mean the gooey mixture inside will cause the cake to collapse/sink as it cools. However, leaving it for longer can make the parkin too dry. The best advice is to check with a skewer 10 minutes before the end baking. Then make a judgement based on how clean the skewer is.
Storage: Once made the Parkin can be wrapped in cling film and stored in an air tight container for a good few weeks. The high amount of sugar in this recipe means that it keeps really well and actually improves with age.

Nutrition

Serving: 83g | Calories: 276kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 292mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 259IU | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips & FAQs.

The post Yorkshire Parkin Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/parkin-for-bonfire-night/feed/ 18
Plum and Rhubarb Crumble https://properfoodie.com/plum-and-rhubarb-crumble/ https://properfoodie.com/plum-and-rhubarb-crumble/#comments Tue, 02 Nov 2021 20:18:23 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14836 Plum and rhubarb crumble, also known as rhubarb crisp, is a classic and comforting British dessert. This easy rhubarb crumble is bursting with sticky caramelised fruit and finished with a traditional crispy crumble topping. Its made extra special with the addition of juicy plums, which adds an natural kick of sweetness to balance out the...

Read More

The post Plum and Rhubarb Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Plum and rhubarb crumble, also known as rhubarb crisp, is a classic and comforting British dessert. This easy rhubarb crumble is bursting with sticky caramelised fruit and finished with a traditional crispy crumble topping. Its made extra special with the addition of juicy plums, which adds an natural kick of sweetness to balance out the tart rhubarb.  

plum and rhubarb crumble cooked in a cast iron pan.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

The middle of summer is the best and most productive time of year for rhubarb. If you've ever grown your own, you will know that at this time of year it goes crazy. Rhubarb crumble is always the first recipe on the list when a large batch of this tart and lovely fruit is ready.

By happy coincidence, mid summer also brings with it plump and juicy plums. Plums and rhubarb were just meant to be together when it comes to a crumble. One balances out the other perfectly they both roast down into a deliciously sweet and sticky filling.

🥘 Ingredients

To make plum and rhubarb crumble you will need:

Ingredients for Plum and Rhubarb crumble

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Fruit filling: You can replace the plums and rhubarb with your preferred fruit filling. Try an apple crumble or just go for all rhubarb or all plums.

Ginger and mixed spice: Sweet spices are great in crumble fro adding extra flavour and warmth. However, you can leave these out or substitute with other sweet spices such as cinnamon, star anise or nutmeg.

Demerara sugar: Demerara has large crunchy crystals with a caramel taste, which is perfect for a crumble. It can be substituted with brown sugar although this has a finer texture and more subtle taste.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Preheat oven to 200°C (390°F). Place plain flour and cold cubed butter into a large mixing bowl. Rub the butter into the flour using your finger tips until well mixed and like breadcrumbs. Set to one side.
  2. In a separate large mixing bowl mix together the sliced plums, chopped rhubarb, 150g Demerara sugar, ground ginger and mixed spice. Stir until the sugar and spice fully coats the fruit.
  3. Next transfer the fruit mixture to an ovenproof dish or cast iron pan. Spread the fruits out to cover the base of the dish. Scatter the crumble mixture over the top of the fruit. Then sprinkle the remaining 50g of sugar evenly over the top of the crumble.
  4. Place the plum and rhubarb crumble in the centre of the oven and bake for 30-40 minutes or until bubbling and golden brown. Four images showing how to make plum and rhubarb crumble for steps 1-4

💭 Expert tips

Crumble: For ease use a food processor to pulse the butter and flour into a crumble

Extra crispy topping: For an extra crispy crumble, finish off the baked crumble under the grill for 1 -2 minutes. Pay close attention as the topping will burn easily.

More crumble: This recipe has more fruit than crumble. I usually concentrate the majority of crumble in the centre and leave some fruit uncovered around the edges. This means that the fruit around the edges has more space to bubble and for the liquids to evaporate, leaving behind richer, sweeter and more caramelised fruit. However, if you would prefer a thicker crumble topping that covers all your fruit, then double the amounts of butter and flour in this recipe.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Do you need to peel rhubarb for a crumble?

Tougher rhubarb, from later on in the season may stringy and so will benefit from the outer edge being lightly peeled. However, in general rhubarb doesn't need to be peeled.

Should rhubarb be cooked before baking?

No, although raw rhubarb is very hard and robust it softened very quickly when exposed to heat. If cooked before baking you will find that the rhubarb becomes too soft and looses its shape.

How to store?

Cooked fruit crumble is best stored in the fridge. Once cooked allow to completely cool then cover with a lid or cling film and refrigerate for up to 4 days. Reheat in the microwave for 1-2 minutes. Note that topping will not be as crisp when reheated.

Can you freeze rhubarb crumble?

This recipe is better frozen before baking and with the raw crumble and filling stored separately. When ready to eat, defrost on the side for a few hours then make up the fruit crumble and bake according to this recipe.

Can you prepare this recipe in advance?

Both the filling and the crumble topping can be prepared in advanced. Refrigerate both separately. When you are ready, put the fruit crumble together and bake. The crumble may need slightly longer in the oven due to the ingredients being chilled.

Plum and rhubarb crumble baked in a iron pan with some served in a bowl with ice cream.

🍨 Other British desserts:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Rhubarb crumble recipe in a round cast iron pan with spoon
Print

Plum and Rhubarb Crumble

Plum and rhubarb crumble, also known as rhubarb crisp, is a classic and comforting British dessert. This easy rhubarb crumble is bursting with sticky caramelised fruit and finished with a traditional crispy crumble topping. Its made extra special with the addition of juicy plums, which adds an natural kick of sweetness to balance out the tart rhubarb.  
Course Dessert, pudding
Cuisine British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 593kcal

Equipment

  • 2 large mixing bowls
  • 1 ovenproof dish or cast iron pan

Ingredients

  • 175 g plain flour
  • 100 g cold butter cubed
  • 250 g plums de-stoned and sliced in half
  • 450 g rhubarb washed and chopped into 2-3cm pieces
  • 1 teaspoon ground ginger
  • ½ teaspoon mixed spice
  • 150 g Demerara sugar for the fruit filling
  • 50 g Demerara sugar for the crumble

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 200°C (390°F). Place plain flour and cold cubed butter into a large mixing bowl. Rub the butter into the flour using your finger tips until well mixed and like breadcrumbs. Set to one side.
    175 g plain flour, 100 g cold butter
  • In a separate large mixing bowl mix together the sliced plums, chopped rhubarb, 150g Demerara sugar, ground ginger and mixed spice. Stir until the sugar and spice fully coats the fruit.
    150 g Demerara sugar, 250 g plums, 450 g rhubarb, 1 teaspoon ground ginger, ½ teaspoon mixed spice
  • Next transfer the fruit mixture to an ovenproof dish or cast iron pan. Spread the fruits out to cover the base of the dish. Scatter the crumble mixture over the top of the fruit. Then sprinkle the remaining 50g of sugar evenly over the top of the crumble.
    50 g Demerara sugar
  • Place the plum and rhubarb crumble in the centre of the oven and bake for 30-40 minutes or until bubbling and golden brown.

Video

Notes

Crumble: For ease use a food processor to pulse the butter and flour into a crumble
Extra crispy topping: For an extra crispy crumble, finish off the baked crumble under the grill for 1 -2 minutes. Pay close attention as the topping will burn easily.
More crumble: This recipe has more fruit than crumble. I usually concentrate the majority of crumble in the centre and leave some fruit uncovered around the edges. This means that the fruit around the edges has more space to bubble and for the liquids to evaporate, leaving behind richer, sweeter and more caramelised fruit. However, if you would prefer a thicker crumble topping that covers all your fruit, then double the amounts of butter and flour in this recipe.
Do you need to peel rhubarb for a crumble? Tougher rhubarb, from later on in the season may stringy and so will benefit from the outer edge being lightly peeled. However, in general rhubarb doesn't need to be peeled.
Should rhubarb be cooked before baking? No, although raw rhubarb is very hard and robust it softened very quickly when exposed to heat. If cooked before baking you will find that the rhubarb becomes too soft and looses its shape.
How to store? Cooked fruit crumble is best stored in the fridge. Once cooked allow to completely cool then cover with a lid or cling film and refrigerate for up to 4 days. Reheat in the microwave for 1-2 minutes. Note that topping will not be as crisp when reheated.
Can you freeze rhubarb crumble? This recipe is better frozen before baking and with the raw crumble and filling stored separately. When ready to eat, defrost on the side for a few hours then make up the fruit crumble and bake according to this recipe.
Can you prepare this recipe in advance? Both the filling and the crumble topping can be prepared in advanced. Refrigerate both separately. When you are ready, put the fruit crumble together and bake. The crumble may need slightly longer in the oven due to the ingredients being chilled.

Nutrition

Serving: 250g | Calories: 593kcal | Carbohydrates: 96g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 186mg | Potassium: 498mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 57g | Vitamin A: 956IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 3mg

This post was first published in Aug 2020. Updated in Nov 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Plum and Rhubarb Crumble appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/plum-and-rhubarb-crumble/feed/ 7
Pear Chutney https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/#comments Mon, 10 Jan 2022 23:54:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5424 Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas...

Read More

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Brown sugar and ginger spiced pears, poached in cider and reduced to a sweet and spicy chutney. Your cheese and biscuits is crying out for this recipe! This easy homemade chutney recipe is also great for using up a glut of pears or generally making use of and preserving some lovely autumnal fruit. It also makes for a pretty good foodie gift or Christmas present, just preserve in jars and add some tags.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney. To make this spiced pear chutney you will need:

Ingredients to make homemade pear chutney.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.

Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.

Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.

Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.

Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.

Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
  2. Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
  3. Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil.
  4. Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally.4 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 1-4.
  5. After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  6. Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.2 step by step images showing how to make pear chutney for steps 5-6.
  7. If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

💭 Expert tips

  • To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
  • Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you sterilise jars?

To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.

How to seal the jars?

Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How to store?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

What makes chutney a chutney?

Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.

Which vinegar is best for chutney?

Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.

A small jar filled with homemade chutney with a larger jar of chutney in the background.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade pear chutney in a small jar with the lid off and a spoonful of chutney to the side.
Print

Pear Chutney

Homemade spiced pear chutney recipe made with fresh pears and apple cider, flavoured with ground spices and cinnamon. A simple and delicious chutney that can be made and jarred in under an hour. Use with cheese and biscuits, serve up with roast chicken or pork casserole or why not save for using as a Christmas chutney or for a lovely foodie gift.
Course Christmas, condiment, Side Dish
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 200kcal

Equipment

  • Masher
  • Jam funnel (for transferring chutney to jars)
  • Jars (for storage)

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 4 medium Echalion shallots finely chopped - 300g
  • 3 large conference pears peeled and chopped into 2cm chunks - 650g
  • 2 red Gala apples cored and chopped into 1cm pieces with skins left on - 180g
  • 2 cm piece fresh ginger peeled and finely chopped
  • 350 ml apple cider
  • 75 ml white wine vinegar 5% acetic acid
  • ½ a lemon juiced
  • 250 g demerara sugar
  • 1 teaspoon mixed spice
  • 1 cinnamon stick

Instructions

  • Add chopped shallots to a large pan with a little oil and fry gently until soft.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 4 medium Echalion shallots
  • Next add the chopped pears, apples and ginger to the pan and mix together.
    3 large conference pears, 2 red Gala apples, 2 cm piece fresh ginger
  • Then add the cider, vinegar, lemon juice, sugar, mixed spice and cinnamon stick. Stir well and bring to the boil
    350 ml apple cider, 75 ml white wine vinegar, ½ a lemon juiced, 250 g demerara sugar, 1 teaspoon mixed spice, 1 cinnamon stick
  • Simmer for 30 minutes, check and stir occasionally
  • After 30 minutes or so, the chutney should have started to thicken. Use a masher to help mush down any larger pieces of apple or pear. Continue to simmer, allowing the liquid to reduce, until you are happy with the consistency.
  • Transfer the hot pear chutney to sterilised jars. Screw the lids on right away so a tight vacuum seal will form as the sauce cools.
  • If you plan to eat the chutney that day or week then once the sauce has cooled, transfer to a dish or container, cover and keep the fridge until needed.

Notes

Pears: This recipe uses conference pears but any variety of pear will work well in this chutney.
Apples: This recipe uses red eating apples, which keep their shape better than baking apples so results in a chunky textures chutney.
Vinegar: Use a vinegar with at least 5% acetic acid. This will ensure proper preserving of the chutney and prevent spoilage.
Demerara sugar: Sugar of course helps to sweeten the chutney but its also an important part of the preserving process, so don't leave it out.
Cider: Cider gives a fantastic flavour to this pear chutney, however if you'd prefer an alcohol free version just replace the cider with apple juice.
Mixed Spice: This is a ground spice mixture of cinnamon, coriander, caraway seeds, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. For a simple substitute use ½ teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.
What makes chutney a chutney? Chutney is usually fruits or vegetables preserved in vinegar and sugar.
Which vinegar is best for chutney? Any vinegar will work well in chutney as long as its contains at least 5% acetic acid, which will kill any bacteria and allow the chutney to be preserved without spoilage. The type of 5% vinegar you choose will be down to taste. For a lighter taste opt for white wine vinegar, for something stronger and sweeter choose an aged balsamic vinegar.
To test the consistency: Spoon some of the chutney onto a small plate and refrigerate for 5 minutes. If you are happy with the thickness of the cooled chutney you can remove the pan from the heat. If not, continue to simmer if too thin, or add more cider/apple juice if too thick.
Handling hot sterilised jars: For ease, use rubber gloves for handling hot jars and to ensure a tight grip when screwing on the lids.
How do you sterilise jars? To sterilise the jars wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). Alternatively, put them through the dishwasher.
How to seal the jars? Place hot pear chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How to store? You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of pear chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 110ml jar | Calories: 200kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 7mg | Potassium: 248mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Dec 2017. Updated in Jan 2022 with new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Pear Chutney appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spiced-pear-cider-christmas-chutney/feed/ 16
Soft Bake Chocolate Chip Cookies Recipe https://properfoodie.com/soft-bake-cookies-chocolate-chunks/ https://properfoodie.com/soft-bake-cookies-chocolate-chunks/#comments Fri, 28 Jul 2017 12:31:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4566 Easy soft bake chocolate chip cookies recipe, with a crumbly outer edge, a gooey centre and melted chunks of Cadburys dairy milk chocolate. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 🍪 Cookies with dairy milk chocolate If you're looking for a little, soft, gooey treat to bake up in the kitchen, then look no further. Definitely, 100 percent make these chocolate...

Read More

The post Soft Bake Chocolate Chip Cookies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Easy soft bake chocolate chip cookies recipe, with a crumbly outer edge, a gooey centre and melted chunks of Cadburys dairy milk chocolate.

homemade soft bake cookies cooling on a wire rack

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍪 Cookies with dairy milk chocolate

If you're looking for a little, soft, gooey treat to bake up in the kitchen, then look no further. Definitely, 100 percent make these chocolate chip cookies, right now! I cannot stress enough how good they are, nor give enough warning about their all-consuming, addictive nature. They must contain some kind of magic, or maybe its just all the sugar and chocolate 🙂

All I can think about right now is how good my treacle and cardamom homemade ice cream would be sandwiched between two of these luscious cookies. 😯 

⏲️ How do you bake soft cookies?

Making soft bake cookies is all about the length of time they are in the oven. I find that baking for around 10 minutes gives a nice soft cookie, whereas 12 minutes gives more of a crunch.

soft bake cookies on a plate

🥘 What you'll need to make this recipe

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: JUMP TO RECIPE CARD

To make 12 of these delicious dairy milk soft bake cookies the ingredients you will need are:

  • 250g Plain flour
  • 100g Caster sugar
  • 250g Cadburys dairy milk chocolate (broken into chunks)
  • 1 medium egg and 1 egg yolk
  • 175g soft brown sugar
  • 150g unsalted butter (room temp)
  • Half teaspoon bicarbonate of soda
  • Pinch of sea salt

Cadburys chocolate substitute: If you can't get hold of any Cadburys chocolate or if you're not a dairy milk fan, you can replace with any other bar of chocolate. Alternatively, why not try this recipes with Chocolate chips, chunks of Terrys chocolate orange, chunks of Galaxy, Malteasers ....the options are endless!

soft bake cookies ingredients

🔪 Step by step instructions

The recipe for these soft bake cookies really is very simple and straight forward. I've used as few ingredients as possible, in order to create a traditional, bog-standard cookie.

  1. Prepare dry ingredients: Pre heat the oven to 200 degrees C. Mix together flour, bicarb of soda and salt in a large bowl.
  2. Mix wet ingredients: Use a stand mixer or electric whisk to combine the soften butter with the brown and white sugar
  3. Add eggs: Gradually add the whisked eggs to the butter and sugar mix to form a cookie dough mix.
  4. Fold in dry ingredients: Add the dry ingredients and the chocolate to the cookie dough mix and fold together until full combined.
  5. Bake: Form balls from the cookie dough and spread evenly on a baking tray. Place in the centre of the oven and bake for 10 minutes or until just golden brown.
  6. Leave to cool: Cool on a wire rack, then serve and enjoy!
Step by step images for making soft bake chocolate chip cookies

🍬  What does brown sugar do during baking?

This recipe calls for 2 types of sugar: the brown is needed due to its molasses content, which is acidic and reacts with the bicarb. The white sugar balances out the brown sugar and stops the cookies becoming too dark during baking. The reaction with the molasses and bicarb helps to create a nice, light cookie due to the production of a bit of air.

And its well worth the extra effort to weigh out two types of sugar. These cookies are extra special, extra tasty and certainly a treat we'll be having plenty more of in the future.

chocolate chip cookies

❄️ Can I freeze soft bake cookies?

It's best to freeze these soft bake cookies before baking. For best results shape the unbaked cookie dough into a cylinder. Wrap with cling film and freeze. When you're ready to bake, remove the frozen cookie dough from the freezer. Unwrap and slice the cylinder into circles around a cm thick. Place the frozen circles onto a baking tray and bake for 20 minutes or until cookies just start to turn golden brown.

💭  Recipe tips for chocolate chip cookies

Use soften, room temperature butter, which will combine with the sugar and make it easier to cream together

Use both brown and white sugar to ensure an even golden colour when baking

Do not rush the addition of the eggs as the mixture can split of added too quickly. If you think you may have added to much egg at any point, add a couple of spoonfuls of the dry ingredients mixture before continuing. 

After forming your cookie dough balls, make sure you space them out well on the tray - they will spread once in the oven.

For a soft bake cookie remove from the oven after around 10 minutes or just as the cookies start to turn golden brown. The cookies may appear underdone at this point but they will harden slightly as they cool. For a harder more crumbly cookie, bake for 12 minutes.

🍰 Other baking recipes you may like to try

For other easy bakes you can try at home have a look at my apple crumble, cinnamon swirls, Bakewell tart, chocolate muffins, raspberry and lemon muffins, banana bread, gooey chocolate brownies recipe, or my super easy lemon drizzle cake.

Other biscuit recipes

Let me know what you think of these dairy milk cookies by leaving a comment and rating below! You can also save this recipe on pinterest: Soft Bake cookies. Or if you prefer you can pin the video!

 30 minutes to produce recipeunder 400 calories recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

homemade soft bake cookies
Print

📋 Soft Bake Cookies with Dairy Milk Chocolate Chunks

Easy and quick soft bake cookies, with a crumbly outer edge, gooey centre and dotted with melted chunks of Cadburys dairy milk chocolate
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, pudding, Snack, treat
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Resting time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 12 cookies
Calories 377.9kcal

Equipment

  • Electric Stand Mixer and hand whisk
  • Flat baking tray

Ingredients

  • 250 g Plain Flour
  • ½ teaspoon Bicarbonate of Soda
  • Pinch of crushed sea salt
  • 150 g Unsalted butter room temp
  • 175 g Soft brown sugar
  • 100 g Caster Sugar
  • 1 medium whole egg
  • 1 medium egg yolk
  • 250 g Cadburys milk chocolate roughly broken up into chunks

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 200 degrees C (fan). Sieve the flour into a large bowl and mix in the bicarb and salt. Set to one side.
    mixing together dry ingredients
  • Cube the soft butter and add to your mixer bowl (or add to a standard large bowl if you are mixing by hand). Add both the brown sugar and caster sugar to the butter and cream together.
    TIP: If using a mixer, start on a low speed and gradually increase to full. Mix on high for 5-10 minutes until creamy and lighter in colour. If mixing by hand use a large wooden spoon and beat for several minutes until light and creamy.
    combining butter and sugar in the food mixer
  • Next, whisk together the whole egg and egg yolk and then slowly add this to your butter mix, with the mixer still on high. Do not rush the addition of the egg. If mixing by hand: add a bit of the egg mixture then stir - continue to add & stir until all the egg is fully combined.
    Gradually adding whisked egg to butter and sugar
  • Next add the flour and chocolate to the mixture and use a spatula to fold in well. Make sure all the flour is fully combined with the cookie mixture.
    mixing flour and chocolate chunks into cookie dough mixture
  • You should now have a nice gooey cookie dough ready for baking. Use your hands to shape the dough into little balls (around 2 - 2.5 cm diameter) and place on a baking tray. Leave plenty of space around each ball as they will spread as they bake. I baked mine in 2 batches to ensure plenty of space.
    making balls out of cookie dough
  • Place the cookie balls in the oven and bake for 10 minutes or until slightly golden. To ensure a soft baked cookie, remove from the oven just as they start to turn golden brown, the cookie dough may appear undercooked but this will set further during cooling and help to keep the cookies soft.
    cooking cookies on wire rack
  • Once removed from the oven, leave to cool on the tray for 5 minutes before carefully transferring to a wire rack. Cool for a further 20 minutes - then enjoy!!
    soft bake cookies fresh out of the oven

Video

Notes

Can I freeze these cookies?
It's best to freeze these dairy milk cookies before baking. For best results shape the unbaked dough into a cylinder. Wrap with cling film and freeze. When you're ready to bake, remove the frozen cookie dough from the freezer. Unwrap and slice the cylinder into circles around a cm thick. Place the frozen circles onto a baking tray and bake for 20 minutes or until cookies just start to turn golden brown.
Recipe tips:
  • Use soften, room temperature butter, which will combine with the sugar and make it easier to cream together
  • Use both brown and white sugar to ensure an even golden colour when baking
  • Do not rush the addition of the eggs as the mixture can split of added too quickly. If you think you may have added to much egg at any point, add a couple of spoonfuls of the dry ingredients mixture before continuing. 
  • After forming your cookie dough balls, make sure you space them out well on the tray - they will spread once in the oven.
  • For a 'soft bake' cookie remove from the oven after around 10 minutes or just as the cookies start to turn golden brown. The cookies may appear underdone at this point but they will harden slightly as they cool. For a harder more crumbly cookie, bake for 12 minutes.
  • Chocolate chip cookies can mean any kind of chocolate so feel free to use standard chocolate chips or dairy milk chunks. Or go for something completely different like chunks of chocolate orange, fruit and nut chunks, malteasers, broken up matchmakers - whatever takes your fancy.
nutritional information for dairy milk cookies

Nutrition

Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 377.9kcal | Carbohydrates: 52.1g | Protein: 4.5g | Fat: 18.3g | Saturated Fat: 10.8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5.1g | Sodium: 120mg | Potassium: 165mg | Fiber: 1.3g | Sugar: 35.4g | Vitamin A: 164.6IU | Calcium: 84.4mg | Iron: 1.3mg

The post Soft Bake Chocolate Chip Cookies Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/soft-bake-cookies-chocolate-chunks/feed/ 13
Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/ https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/#comments Fri, 09 Dec 2016 18:18:28 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3045 A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top...

Read More

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tips for handling and sealing sterilised jars.

Featured ad for Marigold

fig and apple chutney with cheese

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Theres something so sophisticated and decadent about dotting cheese and biscuits with a good dollop of chutney. The best chutney is sweet and tangy all at the same time, which helps to cut through the strong cheese. Figs and balsamic lend themselves perfectly to this task. The seedy figs and dark vinegar also create a chutney with a stunning, deep purple colour and a slight crunch as you bite through it. Delicious.

Figs, by the way, also do exceedingly well in a sweet and sticky homemade fig jam. Or if you're after a different flavoured chutney try my spiced pear and cider chutney.

Fig, apple and balsamic chutney in a bowl

🍽 What equipment do I need?

I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this fig chutney recipe fills about 10 of these. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) this chutney recipe will fill around 6 of these.

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

Preparing the ingredients for the recipe is pretty straight forward. Its mainly a lot of chopping before everything is piled into one pan and simmered for around 30 minutes. To make 10 small jars or 6 large jars of fig chutney you will need the following:

  • 350g red onions chopped
  • 500g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 1 tbsp olive oil
  • 550g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 2 tsp mixed spice
  • 350g muscovado sugar
  • ½ tsp nutmeg
  • ½ tsp cinnamon
  • 150ml red wine vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)
  • 250ml balsamic vinegar (with acetic acid content of at least 5%)

Note: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney. So it just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off)

♨️ Sterilising jars

To sterilise my jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.

🔪 Instructions

To make the fig chutney:

  1. In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.chopping onions with a non slip board
  2. Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.Slicing figs
  3. Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  4. Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  5. After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  1. Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  1. Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
  2. Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.fig chutney in jars

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do I preserve fig and apple chutney?

As figs have a borderline acid pH, its advised to add acid to the jam - usually lemon juice. The acid helps to preserve the fruit correctly. In this case I've added vinegar instead. In terms of this particular recipe the 400ml of vinegar and 350g of sugar should be enough to preserve the chutney for at least 6 months. This is assuming that both vinegars have an acetic acid content of at least 5% and that the chutney is brought to boiling point during cooking and kept there for 30 minutes.

How do I seal the jars?

The chutney should also be transferred to sterilised jars (see above for sterilisation process) whilst it is still hot and jars should be sealed immediately. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.

How should chutney be stored?

You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. If it does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks.
This seal check and the sterilising of the jars in the oven should be enough to ensure the chutney stores well in the cupboard for 6 months. - Have a read of these preserving guidelines for more advice on storing chutneys/jams.
Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.

💭 Top tips with Marigolds

  1. Surprisingly a Marigold glove can come in quite handy when you have a lot to chop. I tend to find that my chopping board wanders off or spins around when I'm chopping. However, pop a marigold glove under the board and problem solved.rubber glove under a chopping board to stop it slipping
  2. Marigolds are also particularly useful when it comes to handling and sealing hot jars. I usually sterilise my jars in a low oven and then transfer the hot chutney straight to the heated jars. The process of getting the chutney into the jar and getting the lids screwed on tight can be tricky when the jars and chutney are so hot. However, pop on a pair of Marigolds and your hands are automatically protected from the heat. In addition, the rubber glove provides extra grip so you can ensure the lids of the jars are screwed on super tight.using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Little homemade jars of chutney also make great Christmas presents - just add a cute label and ribbon and you're good to go. Even better - pair this gift up with a jar of my homemade Cranberry, Apple and Nutmeg sauce or my Spiced Pear and Cider Christmas Chutney 🙂

Other Christmas Recipes

📖 Recipe

Fig and apple chutney with cheese and biscuits
Print

📋 Fig and apple chutney with balsamic vinegar

A deliciously sweet fig chutney with crunchy seeds and sticky balsamic, which makes for the perfect chutney for cheese and biscuits. A great homemade chutney for Christmas and also one of my favourite homemade gifts to give out to friends and family. Find out how to make this lovely apple chutney and get my top tip for handling and sealing sterilised jars.This recipe makes 10 small jars (110ml/4fl oz) or 6 large jars (225ml/8fl oz) of chutney.
Course chutney, condiment, Dessert, sauces, side
Cuisine British
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 110ml jars
Calories 47.1kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 350 g red onions chopped
  • 500 g red apples cored and roughly chopped
  • 550 g large figs stems removed and cut into eighths
  • 350 g muscovado sugar
  • 2 teaspoon mixed spice
  • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • 150 ml red wine vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%
  • 250 ml balsamic vinegar with acetic acid content of at least 5%

Instructions

To make the chutney:

  • In a large pan heat the oil. Add the onions and gently cook until soft and slightly caramelised.
    chopping onions with a non slip board
  • Next add the chopped apples and figs. Sprinkle over the sugar and stir together well to dissolve the sugar.
    Slicing figs
  • Then add 2 teaspoon mixed spice, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ½ teaspoon cinnamon, 150ml red wine vinegar and 250ml balsamic vinegar. Stir well.
    chopped figs and apples cooking in a large pan
  • Bring everything the boil and then turn down the heat and simmer for 30-45 minutes. Check and stir occasionally.
  • After 30 minutes or so use a masher to break up some of the large bits. Continue to simmer until you are happy with the consistency.

If serving immediately:

  • Transfer to a bowl and chill if desired.

If storing in jars:

  • Sterilise your clean jars either in the dishwasher or in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F.
    fig chutney in jars
  • Transfer chutney into your jars whilst it is still hot and screw on the lids tightly (use a jam funnel for ease). A vacuum seal will form as the chutney cools. Tip: Use Marigold gloves to help when handling the hot jars and screwing on the lids.
    using marigold gloves to tighten lids on chutney jars

Notes

Jars: I usually use the small (110ml/4oz) jars and this recipe fills about 10 of those. If you have larger jars (225ml/8oz) it will probably fill around 6 of these.
Should I peel the apples?: I usually leave the skin on the apples as its easier and quicker, adds more flavour and means that theres still chunks of apple in the finished chutney. With the skin off the apple would break up and spread throughout the chutney – so just depends on your taste and if you would prefer chunky chutney (skin on) or smoother chutney (skin off).
How do I preserve my chutney?: In this recipe the 350g of sugar and 400ml of vinegar will preserve the chutney. Make sure that you use vinegars with at least 5% acetic acid content and bring the chutney to the boil and keep there for at least 30 minutes for this to be effective.
How do I sterilise my jars?: To sterilise the jars I usually wash them thoroughly in soapy hot water, then rinse and place on a baking tray in the oven for 5 minutes at 150°C/300°F (until dry). You can also put them through the dishwasher.
How do I seal the jars?: Place hot chutney in hot sterilised jars (use a jam funnel for ease) and seal immediately by screwing on the lid. As the chutney cools a vacuum will form, pulling the lid in nice and tight.
How is should chutney be stored?: You can check the seal of the jars by pressing on the lid to make sure it doesn’t depress any further. Jars of chutney can then be stored in the cupboard for up to 6 months. If the lid does depress and a seal hasn’t formed you will need to use a water bath to ensure proper processing or alternatively store in the fridge for 4-6 weeks. Once opened, after proper sealing, refrigerate and eat within 1 month.
Marigold tips: Use a marigold glove under your chopping bard to keep it steady. Put on a pair of marigolds to protect your hands when handling hot jars and to get a better grip when screwing on the lids.
nutritional info fig and apple chutney

Nutrition

Serving: 45g | Calories: 47.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 10.9g | Vitamin A: 3.6IU | Vitamin C: 1.1mg | Calcium: 14.6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Please note that the above post contains affiliate links, which means if you click these links and then go on to purchase the products, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay.  I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

The post Fig and Apple Chutney with balsamic vinegar appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/fig-apple-balsamic-chutney/feed/ 27
Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/#comments Sun, 04 Feb 2018 08:30:25 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5879 Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!. . . NUTELLA TIGELLA! Nutella Its February! and I have 3 reasons for Nutella consumption this month! The first,...

Read More

The post Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!. . .

NUTELLA TIGELLA!

Italian Tigella with cheese and ham filling

Nutella

Its February! and I have 3 reasons for Nutella consumption this month! The first, which is just around the corner, is World Nutella Day. Yep a whole day devoted to Nutella. The second is pancake day and even though I'm generally a honey and lemon kinda girl, there might be the odd dip in the Nutella jar. And of course the third is Valentines - and I guess consumption of any kind of chocolate in huge quantities is allowed on Valentines day 🙂

Valentines Tigella

Tigella

So now lets talk about Tigella!! NUTELLA TIGELLA. Ben and I were first introduced to the amazing Nutella Tigella in Bologna last year after our amazing Italian wedding when we were honeymooning around Tuscany. We had never come across this type of Italian bread before, even though it was our 5th visit to Italy! I'm so glad that we decided to sit down and give them try.

debbie and ben at zerocinquantino in Bologna

ham and cheese tigella in Bologna

Not content with our basket full of savoury Tigella, we just had to try the Nutella Tigella as well.

nutella tigella in Bologna

Mmm, amazing!! So you know that I just had to give these a whirl myself at home - and World Nutella Day has forced me into action.

Tigella one with brie and ham and one with nutella

Homemade Italian Tigella

The Tigella is quite a basic bread dough, with the addition of a bit of butter. Its actually not a million miles away from my mini bread rolls recipe.

This dough needs to be left to rise (prove) twice, the first time for an hour and the second for 30 minutes, so you need at least an afternoon free to give these delightful little breads a go.

Tigella dough

Unlike the bread rolls, once this dough has risen once, it is then knocked back and rolled out. I rolled my dough to about half a cm in thickness and then cut out my Tigella circles with a 3 inch round cutter (a glass would do the same job).

Tigella dough cut into Tigella circles

These are then proved a second time before being baked for 10 minutes or until they puff up into little pillows - bellissimo! And so simple.

Tigella baked in the oven

Traditionally the Tigella is made in a metal clamp type instrument, which gives them their golden brown colour and imprints a pretty pattern on either side. As the Tigella implement isn't cheap, I decided to improvise.

toastie maker tigella

Baking in the oven for 10 minutes means that the Tigella keep their round shape as they cook and then a quick blast in a toastie maker gives them a lovely golden finish. Although they literally need about 30 seconds in the toastie maker - any more and they dry out a little too much.

I cut mine open after they had baked in the oven and then quickly toasted before adding fillings.

Nutella first:

Nutella Tigella

and then plenty of ham and cheese:

Italian Tigella savoury and sweet

I'm thinking this would make such a lovely feast on Valentines Day 🙂

Find out what else we got to on our honeymoon at Torciano winery and in San Gimignano

📖 Recipe

Italian Tigella savoury and sweet
Print

Italian Tigella

Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 1 hour 50 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 2 hours
Calories 109kcal

Ingredients

  • 500 g 00 Flour
  • 200 ml water
  • 100 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 25 g unsalted butter
  • 10 g fresh yeast or 7g dried yeast
  • Pinch of sea salt

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small pan for heating
  • 3 inch round cutter or upside down glass
  • Lightly oiled baking trays
  • Toastie machine if you wish to toast to a golden brown colour

Instructions

  • Mix the water and milk together in a small pan and heat until just warm (luke warm). Use your finger to test the temperature and stop heating as soon as the mixture feels slightly warm. Next dissolve the yeast in the milk and water and leave to activate for around 10 minutes.
  • Meanwhile melt the butter in a pan or in the microwave. Then sieve the flour into a large bowl and add the salt. Mix well with your fingers then make a well in the flour and pour in the melted butter. Start to mix the flour gradually with your fingers and then begin to add the milk mixture bit by bit. Add enough of the milk mix until the dough comes together. Turn the dough out onto a floured work surface and knead for 10 minutes or until smooth.
  • Lightly oil the bowl and place the kneaded dough in the centre then cover with cling film. Leave to prove (rise) for 1 hour.
  • After an hour turn out the dough and divide into 2 manageable pieces. Roll out one half to around half a cm thick. Using a 3 inch circular cutter or an upside down glass, cut circular shapes into the rolled dough. Gather up the left over dough, re-roll and cut out more circles. Repeat this with the second half of the dough.
  • Line up the dough tigella on lightly oiled baking trays and cover with a damp tea towel. Leave to rise for a second time for 30 minutes.
  • Pre heat oven to 180 degrees
  • After 30 minutes remove the tea towel and transfer the tigella to the oven and bake for 10 minutes.
  • Once baked, slice in half and add your favourite fillings. To add a touch of colour, place the tigella in a toastie maker for 30 seconds before adding the filling.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 109kcal | Carbohydrates: 17.7g | Protein: 7.3g | Fat: 1.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.8g | Sodium: 80mg

The post Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/feed/ 8
Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/ https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/#comments Wed, 17 Feb 2016 08:31:57 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1680 A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg. A few weekends ago myself and a few friends had a night away in London in celebration of a 30th birthday. That's right.... this is the year that me and...

Read More

The post Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg.

Kedgeree in the pan

A few weekends ago myself and a few friends had a night away in London in celebration of a 30th birthday. That's right.... this is the year that me and most of my friends turn 30! This does seem slightly ridiculous, as we can't all possibly be that grown up, but some how - it's all true. However, it does mean that there's lots of celebrating to be done and the first celebration kicked off in London. It was only a quick trip with one night away, but whilst we were there we managed to squeeze in 3 amazing restaurants: The Fish market for lunch, The Shard for a fancy evening meal and Muriel's Kitchen for a detox smoothie and recovery breakfast.

The Fish Market is where the inspiration for this recipe came from. I had a huge mountain of mussels to start in a wonderful creamy white wine sauce with just a hint of chilli. Followed by a wonderfully warming salmon kedgeree, which was just what I needed after the 2 hour train journey and brisk walk in the cool London air.

So once I was back home, I set out to come up with my own take on this vibrant dish. The great thing about kedgeree is that it's really not that difficult and everything can be thrown into one pan. Okay, so the fish needs to be cooked separately and the eggs need to be poached, but these are minor yet tasty details that are well worth the extra effort.

Once the salmon is cooked and in the pot the dish really starts to come together. The plump pink salmon flakes against the bright yellow spiced rice is a match made in fish dish heaven. If you can get a runny yolk as well, then you're definitely in for a treat.

For more healthy breakfast inspiration have a look at my healthy banana bread, breakfast loaf with sultanas, summer porridge bowl, healthy breakfast on the go, Bircher muesli with stewed apples, Orange summer smoothieSalmon kedgeree with boiled eggs, Matcha granola and blueberry yogurt pot, and Full English breakfast bowl.

📖 Recipe

Print

Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs

A beautiful kedgeree rice dish full of the flavours of cardamom and curry served with bright pink pieces of salmon and a runny poached egg
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon Rapeseed/olive oil
  • 2 Salmon fillets
  • 125 g long grain rice
  • 1 red onion diced
  • 5 spring onions roughly chopped
  • 1 garlic clove finely chopped
  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger finely chopped
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 3 cardamom pods crushed
  • ½ teaspoon onion seeds
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon garam masala
  • 500 ml veg stock
  • 1 red chilli finely chopped
  • juice of 1 lemon
  • 1 tin broad beans
  • Handful fresh parsley chopped
  • Handful fresh coriander chopped
  • 2 eggs

Instructions

  • First, heat the oven to 180 degrees C. Place the salmon fillets in the centre of a piece of foil, drizzle with oil and season. Loosely wrap the foil around the fish and bake in the oven for 15-20 minutes.?Next heat up a tablespoon of oil in a wok or large frying pan. Add the red onion and gently cook for 2 minutes.
  • Once the onion has started to soften pour in the uncooked rice and stir well to coat each grain with the oil. Whilst continuing to stir add the garlic, ginger, cardamom pods, turmeric, garam masala and onion seeds. Stir well to ensure the rice is coated with the spices. Add the white wine to the pan and bring to the boil, allowing the wine to soak into the rice. Once the wine has reduced by at least half, pour in the stock, add the spring onions, bring to a simmer and cover with a lid.
  • Leave to cook for around 10 minutes, checking and stirring occasionally.
  • While the rice is cooking, boil a small pan of water then bring to a simmer and poach the 2 eggs by cracking directly into the water. Poach for around 3-4 minutes then plunge into a bowl of cold water to stop the cooking process. When ready to serve place the eggs back into boiling water for 30 seconds in order to reheat.
  • If you prefer the eggs can be boiled in the shell for around 6 minutes, then peeled and sliced into quarters.
  • After the rice has been simmering for 10 minutes, check it is cooked then remove the lid and add the broad beans, red chilli and lemon juice. Stir well and cook with the lid off for a further 2 minutes.?Flake the cooked salmon and remove the pan from the heat. Add the salmon to the rice along with the parsley and coriander. Stir gently then serve up along with the eggs.

The post Kedgeree with poached or boiled eggs appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/kedgeree-with-poached-eggs/feed/ 2